96 grand marquis

[PI00020( G )05/95]

thirty-six pica chart:0011171-C

File:rcpig.exUpdate:Tue Feb 13 08:44:22 1996

*[PI00400( ALL)05/95]

thirty-six pica chart:


*[PI00425( ALL)05/95]

Table of Contents

Introductory Information ............................... 1

Safety Restraints .............................................. 7

Starting Your Grand Marquis .................... 37

Warning Lights and Gauges ....................... 47

Instrument Panel Controls .......................... 87

Steering Column Controls ........................ 111

Features .......................................................... 123

Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 149

Driving Your Grand Marquis .................. 171

Roadside Emergencies ................................ 195

Customer Assistance ................................... 213

Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 221

Accessories .................................................... 225

Servicing Your Grand Marquis ............... 233

Quick Index .................................................. 303

Index ............................................................... 313

Service Station Information ...................... 332


1

Introductory Information

*[IN00300( ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You

*[IN00500( ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles

*[IN00600( ALL)04/95] ❑Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, thequality of our products and services must beour number one priority.

*[IN00700( ALL)04/95] ❑You are the focus of everything we do. Ourwork must be done with you in mind,providing better products and services thanour competition.

*[IN00750( ALL)04/95] ❑Continuous improvement is essential to oursuccess. We must strive for excellence ineverything we do: in our products — in theirsafety and value — and in our services, ourhuman relations, our competitiveness, andour profitability.

*[IN00800( ALL)04/95] ❑Employee involvement is our way of life.We are a team. We must treat one anotherwith trust and respect.

*[IN00900( ALL)04/95] ❑Dealers and suppliers are our partners. Wemust maintain mutually beneficialrelationships with dealers, suppliers, and ourother business associates.

*[IN01000( ALL)04/95] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conductworldwide must be pursued in a manner thatis socially responsible and commands respectfor its integrity and for its positivecontributions to society.

File:rcing.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 08:09:44 1996

2

*[IN01100( ALL)04/95] Things to Know About UsingThis Guide

*[IN01200( ALL)04/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your newvehicle. This guide has information about theequipment and the options for your new vehicle.You may not have bought all of the optionsavailable to you. If you do not know whichinformation applies to your vehicle, talk to yourdealer.

*[IN01300( ALL)04/95] This guide describes equipment and givesspecifications for equipment that was in effectwhen this guide was approved for printing. Fordmay discontinue models or change specificationsor design without any notice and withoutincurring obligation.

*[IN01400( ALL)05/95] NOTES and WARNINGS

*[IN01420( ALL)05/95] NOTES give you additional information aboutthe subject matter you are referencing.

*[IN01440( ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially carefulin those areas where carelessness can causedamage to your vehicle or personal injury toyourself, your passengers or other people. Pleaseread all WARNINGS carefully.

*[IN01460( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

*[IN01500( ALL)04/95] Finding Information in This Guide

*[IN01600( ALL)04/95] After you have read this guide once, you willprobably return to it when you have a specificquestion or need additional information. To helpyou find specific information quickly, you canuse the Quick Index or the Index.


3

*[IN01700( ALL)05/95] The Quick Index at the end of the bookprovides a page number following each itemwhich indicates where detailed information canbe found.

*[IN01900( ALL)04/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the bookand search in the alphabetical listing for theword that best describes the information youneed. If the word you chose is not listed, thinkof other related words and look them up. Wehave designed the Index so that you can findinformation under a technical term.

%*[IN02000( ALL)04/95] Canadian Owners — French Version

*[IN02100( ALL)04/95] French Owner Guides can be obtained from yourdealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company ofCanada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.

*[IN02400( ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule andRecord Booklet

*[IN02500( ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet liststhe services that are most important for keepingyour vehicle in good condition. A record log isalso provided to help you keep track of allservices performed.

%*[IN02600( ALL)01/95] About the Warranties[IN02700( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is covered by three types of

warranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, ExtendedWarranties on certain parts, and EmissionsWarranties.

%*[IN03100( ALL)03/95] Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefullyto find out about your vehicle’s warranties andyour basic rights and responsibilities.


4

*[IN03250( ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, youcan get a new one free of charge. Contact anyFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to theaddresses and phone numbers on the first pageof this owner guide.

%*[IN04000( ALL)01/95] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan

*[IN04100( ALL)01/94] If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you canbuy a Ford Extended Service Plan for yourvehicle. This optional contract provides serviceprotection for a longer period of time than thebasic warranty that comes with your vehicle.

*[IN04200( ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when youbuy your vehicle. However, your option topurchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runsout after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See yourdealer for more details about the Ford ExtendedService Plan.

*[IN04250( ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did nottake advantage of the Ford Extended ServicePlan at the time of purchase, you may still beeligible. See your dealer for the details.

%*[IN06000( ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In

*[IN06100( ALL)03/95] Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment orbreak-in period during the first 1,000 miles(1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-inperiod, you need to pay careful attention to howyou drive your vehicle.

%*[IN06300( ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehiclehas new brake linings, you should take thesesteps:

*[IN06400( ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you cananticipate when to stop.

*[IN06500( ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance.

*[IN06600( ALL)01/95] — Apply the brakes gradually.


5

*[IN06700( ALL)01/95] The break-in period for new brake liningslasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving.

%*[IN06800( ALL)01/95] ❑Use only the type of engine oil that Fordrecommends. See Engine oil recommendationsin the Index. Do not use special “break-in”oils.

*[IN07000( ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with an ElectronicPowertrain Control Module that limits engineand/or vehicle speeds with a cut-out mode topromote durability.

%*[IN07100( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of YourVehicle

*[IN07130( ALL)05/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damagethe paint, especially in hot weather. Wash yourvehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean.

*[IN07160( ALL)05/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle isexposed to chemical industrial fallout.

*[IN07190( ALL )05/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is notrelated to a defect in paint materials orworkmanship and therefore is not covered bywarranty. Ford, however, believes that continualimprovement in customer satisfaction is a highpriority. For this reason, Ford has authorizedtheir dealers to repair, at no charge to theowner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged byenvironmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comesfirst. Customers may be required to bring theirvehicle in for inspection by a Fordrepresentative.


6

%*[IN07200( ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle

*[IN07300( ALL)04/95] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including theunderside, with a mild detergent.

*[IN07400( ALL)04/95] DO NOT:

*[IN07500( ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle with hot water

*[IN07600( ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while it sits in directsunlight

*[IN07700( ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while the body is hot

*[IN08100( ALL)04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful depositsand protect the finish.

%*[IN08200( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts

*[IN08300( ALL)04/95] Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a milddetergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, fuel, or strong detergents.

%*[IN08400( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts

*[IN08500( ALL)04/95] Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts areplastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover ifnecessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routinecleaning.

*[IN08600( ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solventsor petroleum-based cleaners.

%*[IN08700( ALL)04/95] If you have your vehicle rustproofed, removeoversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oilremover. If rustproofing is not removed fromplastic and rubber parts, it can causedeterioration.


7

Safety Restraints

%*[SR00500( ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information

*[SR00600( ALL)03/95] The use of safety belts helps to restrain you andyour passengers in case of a collision. In moststates and in Canada the law requires their use.

*[SR00800( ALL)01/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when:

*[SR00900( ALL)01/95] ❑ the seatback is upright

*[SR01000( ALL)01/95] ❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)

*[SR01100( ALL)01/95] ❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips

*[SR01200( ALL)01/95] ❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest

*[SR01300( ALL)01/95] ❑ the knees are straight forward

*[SR02100( ALL)05/95] To help you remember to fasten your safety belt,a warning light may come on and a chime maysound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime inthe Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.

*[SR02500( ALL)01/95] See the following sections in this chapter fordirections on how to properly use these safetybelts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in thischapter for special instructions about usingsafety belts for children.

%*[SR02600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Make sure that you and your passengerswear safety belts. Always drive and ridewith your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.

File:rcsrg.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 08:09:22 1996

8

*[SR02700( ALL)03/95] RWARNING

Never wear the shoulder belt under thearm. Never swing it around the neck overthe inside shoulder. Never use a singlebelt for more than one person or acrossmore than one seating position. Eachseating position in your vehicle has aspecific safety belt assembly which ismade up of one buckle and one tonguethat are designed to be used as a pair.Failure to follow these precautions couldincrease the risk and/or severity of injuryin a collision.


Never drive or ride with a twisted orjammed safety belt. If you cannot untwistor unjam the safety belt, see the nearestqualified technician immediately.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, children should always ride withthe seatback upright.


Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.

*[SR03200( ALL)05/95] Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving tolessen the risk of the door coming open in acollision.


9

[SR03700( ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and ShoulderBelts

*[SR03800( ALL)01/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combinationlap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement.However, if you brake hard, corner hard or ifyour vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder beltlocks and helps reduce your forward movement.

*[SR04100( ALL)05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the doorand lock it. Then adjust the seat to the positionthat suits you best.

[SR04400( ALL)06/93] To fasten the belt, pull the lap/shoulder beltfrom the retractor so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be surethe belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist.Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckleuntil you hear a snap and feel it latch. Makesure the tongue is securely fastened in thebuckle.

*[SR04550( BCGV)01/95]

quarter page art:0010018-B

Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt


10

[SR04600( BCGV)03/95]

one third page art:0010502-A

Fastening the rear seat combination lap and shoulder belt

*[SR04675( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandImportant Safety Belt Information atthe beginning of this chapter.

% [SR04676( GV)03/95] Safety Belts for All Passenger OutboardSeating Positions

[SR04679( GV)03/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor on the shoulder belt portion ofthe combination lap/shoulder safety belt for thefront and rear outboard passenger seats.

*[SR04682( ALL)05/95] Dual locking mode retractors operate in twoways:

*[SR04683( ALL)03/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode

[SR04684( ALL)03/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder beltretractor will allow the occupant freedom ofmovement, locking tight only on hard braking,hard cornering or impacts of approximately5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can alsobe made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt.


11

%*[SR04685( ALL)04/95] Automatic locking mode

[SR04686( ALL)03/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder beltretractor will be automatically locked and remainlocked when the combination lap/shouldersafety belt is buckled, and does not allow theoccupant freedom of movement. This modeprovides the following:

[SR04687( ALL)03/95] ❑A tight lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant.

[SR04688( ALL)03/95] ❑Child seat or infant carrier installationrestraint.


Never install a rear-facing child seat orinfant carrier in the right front passengerseat.

*[SR04690( ALL)03/95] This mode must be used when installing a childsafety seat on the front passenger seat and rearoutboard seats where dual locking retractors areprovided.

*[SR04691( ALL)04/95] To switch the retractor from the emergencylocking mode to the automatic locking mode,perform the following steps:

*[SR04692( ALL)03/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.

*[SR04693( ALL)03/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted, and when allowed to retract, aclicking sound will be heard. At this time,the belt retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child restraint mode).

*[SR04694( ALL)05/95] 3. A clicking sound will contnue to be heard asthe belt is allowed to retract.


12

[SR04695( ALL)03/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulderbelt is unbuckled and allowed toretract completely, the retractor willswitch back to the vehicle sensitive(emergency) locking mode. See thedetailed instructions under Safety Seatsfor Children in this chapter.

%*[SR04795( GV)05/95] Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment

*[SR04800( GV)04/95] Driver and right front passenger

*[SR04900( GV)01/95] You can adjust the shoulder belt height to one offive (5) positions. To adjust, pinch the releasebutton (see Figures 1 and 2) and slide it up ordown until the belt rests across the middle ofyour shoulder. Release the button and make surethe adjuster is firmly in one of the five (5)positions.

*[SR04940( GV)02/95] RWARNING

If the shoulder belt is off your shoulderor on your upper arm, there is a greaterrisk of severe injury in a collision.

[SR04950( GV)12/94] BE SURE THE BELT IS PROPERLYPOSITIONED ON YOUR SHOULDER EACHTIME YOU USE THE BELT.


13

[SR05200( GV)06/93]

half page art:0010701-A

The shoulder belt height adjuster

[SR05300( GV)11/92]


The shoulder belt height adjuster


The lap belts should fit snugly and as lowas possible around the hips, not aroundthe waist.


14

*[SR05500( BCGV)03/95] RWARNING

All front and rear seat outboardoccupants (including pregnant women)should wear lap and shoulder belts, foroptimum protection in a collision.


Failure to follow these precautions couldincrease the risk and/or severity of injuryin a collision. 1) Use the shoulder belt onthe outside shoulder only. Never wear theshoulder belt under the arm. 2) Neverswing it around your neck over the insideshoulder. 3) Never use a single belt formore than one person.

[SR05800( ALL)05/95] To unfasten all the belts:

[SR06000( GV)06/93] 1. Push the release button in the center of thebuckle. This allows the tongue to unlatchfrom the buckle.

[SR06300( GV)06/93]

quarter page art:0011166-A

Unfastening the outboard lap/shoulder belts

*[SR06600( ALL)03/95] 2. While the belt retracts, guide the tongue toits stowed position. If you do not guide thetongue, it may strike you or part of thevehicle.


15

[SR09400( G )05/95] Lap Belts — Center SeatingPositions

*[SR09500( GV)05/95] The lap belts in the center of the front and rearseats do not adjust automatically. You mustadjust them to fit snugly and as low as possiblearound your hips. Do not wear them aroundyour waist.

*[SR09701( BCGV)05/95] Pull the belt across your hips and insert thetongue into the correct buckle on your seatuntil you hear a snap and feel it lock. Make surethe buckle is securely fastened.

%*[SR09801( BCGV)05/95] If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it andtip the belt tongue at a right angle to the belt.Pull the belt tongue over your lap until itreaches the buckle.

*[SR09901( BCGV)05/95] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the looseend of the webbing until the belt fits snugly.

*[SR10300( BCGV)05/95] To unfasten the belt, push the release button onthe buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatchfrom the buckle.

[SR10500( GV)11/92] Because the center lap belts do not haveretractors, they should be shortened and fastenedwhen not in use.

[SR10600( GV)11/92]


Unfastening center lap safety belts


16

%*[SR17500( ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly

*[SR17600( ALL)05/95] For some people, the safety belt may be tooshort even when it is fully extended. You canadd about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt lengthwith a safety belt extension assembly (partnumber 611C22). Safety belt extensions areavailable at no cost from your dealer.


Failure to follow these instructions willaffect the performance of the safety beltsand increase the risk of personal injury.

*[SR17705( ALL)05/95] Use only extensions manufactured by the samesupplier as the safety belt. Manufactureridentification is located at the end of thewebbing on the label. Also, use the safety beltextension only if the safety belt is too short foryou when fully extended. Do not use extensionto change the fit of the shoulder belt across thetorso.

[SR17710( ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Maintenance

*[SR17720(MBCG )05/95] Check the safety belt systems periodically tomake sure that they work properly and are notdamaged.

%*[SR17730( ALL)05/95] All safety belt assemblies, including retractors,buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies(slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tetherbracket assemblies (if equipped), and attachinghardware, should be inspected after anycollision. Ford recommends that all safety beltassemblies used in vehicles involved in acollision be replaced. However, if the collisionwas minor and a qualified technician finds thatthe belts do not show damage and continue to


17

operate properly, they do not need to bereplaced. Safety belt assemblies not in useduring a collision should also be inspected andreplaced if either damage or improper operationis noted.

%*[SR17740( ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts

*[SR17780( ALL)05/95] Clean the safety belts with any mild soapsolution that is recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye thebelt webbing because this may weaken it.

*[SR17800( ALL)04/95] Air Bag Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS)

*[SR18200( ALL)04/95] The driver and right front passenger air bags areSupplemental Restraint Systems (SRS), providedat these seating positions in addition to thelap/shoulder belt, and are designed tosupplement the protection provided to properlybelted occupants in moderate to severe frontalcollisions. The supplemental air bag system doesnot provide restraint to the lower body.

*[SR18400( ALL)02/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts


Safety belts must be worn by all vehicleoccupants to be properly restrained andhelp reduce the risk of injury in acollision.


All occupants of the vehicle, including thedriver, should always wear their safetybelts, even when an air bag SupplementalRestraint System is provided.


18

*[SR18500( ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to usesafety belts even with an air bag system. Useyour safety belts to:

*[SR18600( ALL)01/95] ❑help keep you in the proper position (awayfrom the air bag) when it inflates

*[SR18700( ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side orrear impact collisions, because an air bag isnot designed to inflate in such situations

*[SR18800( ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisionsthat are not severe enough to activate thesupplemental air bag

*[SR18900( ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of being thrown from yourvehicle

%*[SR19100( ALL)01/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated

*[SR19200( ALL)05/95] In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremelyfast to help provide additional protection foryou. In order to do this, the air bag must inflatewith considerable force. If you are not seated ina normal riding position with your back againstthe seatback, the air bag may not protect youproperly and could possibly hurt you as itinflates.


If a passenger is not properly seated andrestrained, an inflating air bag could causeserious injury.


Rear-facing infant seats should never beplaced in the front seat.


19

[SR19240( ALL)06/09] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head iscloser to the air bag. The force of the rapidlyinflating air bag could push the top of therear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback,center console (if so equipped), or centerarmrests (if so equipped). REAR-FACINGINFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE SECUREDIN THE REAR SEAT, and other child safetyseats and infant seats should be secured in therear seat whenever possible.

*[SR19260( ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right frontpassenger air bag. Air bags deploy with greatforce, faster than the blink of an eye. Frontpassengers, especially children and small adults,must never sit on the front edge of the seat,stand near the glove compartment of theinstrument panel, or lean over near the air bagcover when the vehicle is moving. All occupantsshould sit with their backs against the seatback,move the seat to the most rearward position ifpossible and use the safety belts. Childrenweighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always shoulduse child or infant seats.


When using forward-facing child seatsmove the passenger seat as far back fromthe instrument panel as possible. NEVERSECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATSIN THE FRONT SEAT.

*[SR19325( GV)05/95] THE FORCE OF THE RAPIDLY INFLATINGPASSENGER AIR BAG COULD PUSH THE TOPOF THE REAR-FACING SEAT AGAINST THEVEHICLE SEATBACK, ARMRESTS ORCONSOLE. REAR-FACING INFANT SEATSMUST ALWAYS BE SECURED IN THE REARSEAT.


20


Do not place objects or mount equipmenton or near the air bag cover on thesteering wheel or in front seat areas thatmay come in contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow this instruction mayincrease the risk of personal injury in theevent of a collision.

*[SR19405( ALL)05/95] For additional important safety information onthe proper use of seat belts, child seats, andinfant seats, please read the other sections of thispart of the Owner Guide, especially sectionsentitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seatsfor Children.

*[SR19410( ALL)05/95] For further information about the propermounting of equipment in the front seat of thisvehicle, please refer to Ford’s brochure entitledSome Important Information About Air BagSupplemental Restraint System which can beobtained by calling Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.Ask for brochure FPS-8602.

%*[SR19500( ALL)01/95] How the Air Bag Supplemental RestraintSystem Operates

[SR19650( ALL)05/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steeringwheel. The right front passenger seat air bag isin the upper right hand section of theinstrument panel ledge above the glovecompartment. Both air bags are designed to stayout of sight until they are activated.


21

[SR20200( GV )05/95]

half page art:0010671-G

The location of the air bag and warning labels

*[SR20800( ALL)05/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense theseverity of the impact and activates the air bagsif necessary. The air bag system is designed todeploy in frontal and front-angled collisionsmore severe than hitting a parked vehicle (ofsimilar size and weight) head-on at about28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system sensesthe crash severity rather than vehicle speed,some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph(45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag.

*[SR20930( ALL)05/95] The whole inflation and deflation process takesplace in a matter of seconds.


22


Air bag system components get hot afterinflation. Do not touch them afterinflation.

*[SR21110( ALL)03/93]


Inflated driver side air bag


23

[SR21130( ALL)10/94]


Inflated right front passenger side air bag


If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAGWILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN ANDMUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. Ifthe air bag is not replaced, the unrepairedarea will increase the risk of injury in acollision.

*[SR22210( ALL)05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light and atone to indicate the condition of the system. Thereadiness light is in the instrument cluster. Whenyou turn the ignition to the ON position, thislight will illuminate for approximately six (6)seconds and then turn off. This indicates that thesystem is operating normally. NOTE:Maintenance of the air bag system is notrequired.


24

%*[SR22220( ALL)05/95] A problem with the system is indicated by oneor more of the following:

[SR22225( ALL)05/95] ❑ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,or

[SR22230( ALL)05/95] ❑ it will not light immediately after the ignitionis turned on, or

[SR22240( ALL)05/95] ❑a group of five beeps will be heard.

*[SR22250( ALL)05/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bagsystem serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer immediately. Unless serviced, the air bagsupplemental restraint system may not functionproperly in the event of a collision.


Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the Air Bag SupplementalRestraint System or its fuses. See yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

%*[SR22300( ALL)05/95] Disposal of air bags or air bag equippedvehicles

*[SR22400( ALL)05/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equippedvehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of byqualified personnel.

%*[SR23500( ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children

*[SR23600( ALL)02/95] In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by lawto use safety restraints for children. If smallchildren ride in your vehicle — this generallyincludes children who are four years old oryounger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) orless — you must put them in safety seats thatare made specially for children. Safety beltsalone do not provide maximum protection forthese children. Check your local and state lawsfor specific requirements.


25


Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.


Passengers should not be allowed to ridein the cargo area. Persons not riding in aseat with a fastened seat belt are muchmore likely to suffer serious injury in acollision. Cargo should always be securedto prevent it from shifting and causingdamage to the vehicle or harm topassengers.

*[SR23900( ALL)05/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat ofyour vehicle. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seating positions than in the frontseating positions.


Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’sinstructions included with the safety seatyou put in your vehicle. If you do notinstall and use the safety seat properly,the child may be injured in a sudden stopor collision.


Safety belts and seats can become hot in avehicle that has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a small child.Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


26


Never leave a child unattended in yourvehicle.


When using forward-facing child seatsmove the passenger seat as far back fromthe instrument panel as possible. NEVERSECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATSIN THE FRONT SEAT.

%*[SR25100( ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children

*[SR25200( ALL)05/95] Use a safety seat that is recommended for thesize and weight of the child. Always follow thesafety seat manufacturer’s instructions wheninstalling and using the safety seat.

% [SR25225( ALL)04/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seathaving a top tether strap. Install the child safetyseat in a seating position which is capable ofproviding a tether anchorage. For moreinformation on top tether straps see your Fordor Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[SR25250( ALL)02/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure touse the correct safety belt buckle for that seatingposition, and make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle.


27

*[SR25275( ALL)05/95] Children weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg)should use child or infant seats. Forward facingchild seats must have the passenger seat movedas far back from the instrument panel aspossible.


REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULDNEVER BE USED IN THE FRONT SEAT.REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUSTALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE REARSEAT. Failure to follow these instructionscould result in serious injury.

*[SR25350( ALL)05/95] All child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by thelap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.


If you do not properly secure the safetyseat, the child occupying the seat may beinjured during a collision or sudden stop.An unsecured safety seat could also injureother passengers.


Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’sinstructions included with the safety seatyou put in your vehicle. If you do notinstall and use the safety seat properly,the child may be injured in a sudden stopor collision.


28

% [SR31857( GV)03/95] Installing Safety Seats in the Front andRear Outboard Passenger Seating Positions

[SR31861( ALL)03/95] For seating positions equipped with a duallocking mode retractor, use the followingprocedure.

[SR31865( ALL)03/95] If you choose to install a child safety seat orinfant carrier in the front seating positions, movevehicle seat as far back as possible.

*[SR31870( ALL)04/95] 1. Position the child seat in the center of thepassenger seat.

*[SR31875( ALL)04/95] 2. Pull down on shoulder belt, then graspshoulder belt and lap belt together. Figure 1.

*[SR31880( ALL)04/95]

half page art:0011238-B


29

*[SR31885( ALL)04/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tongue throughthe child seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Besure that the belt webbing is not twisted.

*[SR31890( ALL)04/95]


Routing the lap/shoulder belt


30

*[SR31893( ALL)04/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for thatseating position until you hear and feel thelatch engage. Figure 3. Make sure tongue islatched securely to buckle by pulling ontongue.

*[SR31895( ALL)04/95]


Buckling the belt


31

*[SR31900( ALL)04/95] 5. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted and a click is heard. At this time,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child seat restraint mode). Figure 4.

*[SR31902( ALL)04/95] NOTE: The dual-locking mode retractor mustbe in the automatic locking mode toproperly restrain a child.

*[SR31905( ALL)04/95]


Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode

*[SR31910( ALL)04/95] 6. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder webbing. A clicking sound will beheard as the belt retracts. This indicates theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.Push down on the child seat while you pullup on the belt to remove any slack in thebelt. Figures 5 and 6.


32

*[SR31915( ALL)04/95]


*[SR31920( ALL)04/95]



33

*[SR31925( ALL)04/95] 7. Before placing the child in the child seat,forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, andtug it forward to make sure that the seat issecurely held in place, Figure 7.

*[SR31930( ALL)04/95]


Checking that the seat is secure

*[SR31935( ALL)04/95] 8. Double check that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode. Try to pull morebelt out of the retractor. If you cannot, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode,Figure 8.


34

*[SR31940( ALL)04/95]


Checking the retractor

*[SR31945( ALL)04/95] 9. Check to make sure that the child seat isproperly secured prior to each use. If theretractor is not locked, repeat steps 4through 7.

% [SR32150( BCGV)03/95] Installing a Child Safety Seat at the RearCenter Seating Position with AdjustableLap Belt

[SR32160( BCGV)03/95] 1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt,hold the tongue so that its bottom isperpendicular to the direction of webbingwhile sliding the tongue up the webbing.

[SR32170( BCGV)03/95] 2. Place the child safety seat in the centerseating position.

[SR32180( BCGV)03/95] 3. Route the tongue and webbing through thechild seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions.


35

[SR32190( BCGV)03/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper bucklefor the center seating position until you heara snap and feel it latch. Make sure thetongue is securely fastened to the buckle bypulling on tongue.

[SR32200( BCGV)03/95] 5. Push down on the child seat while pullingon the loose end of the lap belt webbing totighten the belt.

[SR32210( BCGV)03/95] 6. Before placing the child into child seat,forcibly tilt the child seat from side-to-sideand in forward direction to ensure that theseat is held securely in place. If the childseat moves excessively, repeat steps 5through 6, or properly install the child seatin a different position.

%*[SR38300( ALL)05/95] Safety Belts for Children

*[SR38400( ALL)05/95] Children who are too large for child safety seatsshould always wear safety belts. (See instructionswith your child seat, or contact its manufacturer,to determine maximum size of child that willsafely fit in the seat.)


If safety belts are not properly worn andadjusted as described, the risk of seriousinjury to the child in a collision will bemuch greater.

*[SR38600(MBCGV )05/95] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap andshoulder belts can be positioned so that it doesnot cross or rest in front of the child’s face orneck, the child should wear the lap and shoulderbelt. Moving the child closer to the center of thevehicle may help provide a good shoulder beltfit.


36

[SR38800( GV)12/94] RWARNING

If the shoulder belt cannot be properlypositioned, the child should sit in thecenter rear seat and use the lap belt or, ifthat seat is unavailable, in the center frontseat and use the lap belt.

*[SR38830( ALL)04/95] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts onchildren who have outgrown child safety seats,Ford recommends use of a belt-positioningbooster seat that is labelled as conforming to allFederal motor vehicle safety standards.Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child andprovide a shorter, firmer seating cushion thatencourages safer seating posture and better fit oflap and shoulder belts on the child. Abelt-positioning booster should be used if theshoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face orneck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly onboth thighs, or if the thighs are too short to letthe child sit all the way back on the seat cushionwhen the lower legs hang over the edge of theseat cushion. You may wish to discuss thespecific needs of your child with yourpediatrician.


Do not use a belt-positioning booster witha lap-only belt.

*[SR38900( ALL)05/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap andshoulder belts should always be worn snuglyand below the hips, touching the child’s thighs.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, children should always ride withthe seatback upright.


37

Starting Your GrandMarquis

*[ST03400( ALL)03/95] Ignition%*[ST03500( ALL)01/95] Understanding the Positions of the Ignition

[ST03750( ALL)12/94]


The positions of the key in the ignition

%*[ST03901( BCGV)03/95] ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’selectrical accessories such as the radio and thewindshield wipers to operate while the engine isnot running.

% [ST04001( ALL)12/94] LOCK locks the steering wheel. It also locks theautomatic transmission gearshift lever.

*[ST04101( ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you toremove the key. The LOCK feature helps toprotect your vehicle from theft.

*[ST04200( ALL)03/95] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and allaccessories without locking the steering wheel orthe automatic transmission gearshift lever.

*[ST04300( ALL)03/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warninglights (except the brake system warning light) tomake sure they work before you start theengine. The key returns to the ON position oncethe engine is started and remains in this positionwhile the engine runs.

File:rcstg.exUpdate:Wed Jun 28 16:26:28 1995

38

*[ST04400( ALL)03/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key oncethe engine starts so that you do not damage thestarter. The key should return to ON when yourelease it. The START position also allows youto test the brake warning light.

%*[ST04900( ALL)02/95] Removing the Key From the Ignition

*[ST05600( BCGV)03/95] 1. Put the gearshift in P (Park).

*[ST05800( ALL)01/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully.

*[ST05900( BCGV)03/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

*[ST06050( BCGV)03/95] 4. Remove the key.

[ST06660( BCGV)03/95] NOTE: The automatic transmission gearshiftmust be in P (Park) to move the key tothe lock position.

%*[ST06675( ALL)05/95] If the key is stuck in the LOCK position, movethe steering wheel left or right until the keyturns freely.

%*[ST06700( ALL)03/95] If the driver’s door is open while the key is stillin the ignition, a warning chime sounds.

*[ST06825( BCGV)05/95] RWARNING

Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure that the gearshift is securelylatched in P (Park).

*[ST06875( ALL)01/93] RWARNING

Do not leave children, unreliable adults,or pets alone in your vehicle. They couldaccidentally injure themselves or othersthrough inadvertent operation of thevehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere and possibly fatal injuries topeople as well as animals.


39

%*[ST07000( ALL)03/95] Fuel-Injected Engines

*[ST07100( ALL)03/95] When starting a fuel-injected engine, the mostimportant thing to remember is to avoidpressing down on the accelerator before orduring starting. Only use the accelerator whenyou have problems getting your vehicle started.See Starting Your Engine in this chapter fordetails about when to use the accelerator whileyou start your vehicle.

*[ST07300( ALL)03/95] Starting Your Vehicle%*[ST07400( ALL)05/94] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle


Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or other enclosed area. Never sit ina stopped vehicle for more than a shortperiod of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See GuardingAgainst Exhaust Fumes in this chapter formore instructions.

*[ST07600( ALL)01/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following:

*[ST07700( ALL)01/95] 1. Make sure you and all your passengersbuckle your safety belts. See Safety Restraintsin the Index for more details.

*[ST07800( ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure the headlamps and otheraccessories are turned off when starting.

*[ST08100( BCGV)03/95] 3. Make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park)and the parking brake is set before you turnthe key.

*[ST08400( ALL)03/95] Before you start your vehicle, you should testthe warning lights on the instrument panel tomake sure that they work. Refer to the WarningLights and Gauges chapter.


40

%*[ST10300( ALL)02/95] Starting Your Engine

*[ST10325( ALL)02/95] To start your engine:

*[ST10350( ALL)05/95] 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to StartYour Vehicle at the beginning of this section.

*[ST10353( ALL)03/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

*[ST10357( ALL)03/95] 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting your engine. DO NOT use theaccelerator while the vehicle is parked.

*[ST10360( ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position(cranking) until the engine starts. Allow thekey to return to the ON position after theengine has started.

*[ST10370( ALL)02/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key,rotate the steering wheel slightly because itmay be binding.

%*[ST10430( ALL)04/95] For a cold engine:

*[ST10440( ALL)04/95] ❑At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: Ifthe engine does not start in fifteen (15)seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,wait approximately ten (10) seconds so youdo not flood the engine, then try again.

*[ST10450( ALL)04/95] ❑At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If theengine does not start in five (5) seconds onthe first try, turn the key to OFF, waitapproximately ten (10) seconds so you do notflood the engine, then try again.

%*[ST10460( ALL)04/95] For a warm engine:

*[ST10470( ALL)04/95] ❑Do not hold the key in the START positionfor more than five (5) seconds at a time. Ifthe engine does not start within five (5)seconds on the first try, turn the key to theOFF position. Wait a few seconds after thestarter stops, then try again.


41

*[ST10473( ALL)04/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the keyas soon as the engine starts. Excessive crankingcould damage the starter or flood the engine.

*[ST10476( ALL)04/95] After you start the engine, let it idle for a fewseconds. Keep your foot on the brake pedal andput the gearshift lever in gear. Release theparking brake. Slowly release the brake pedaland drive away in the normal manner.

[ST10478( ALL)12/94] NOTE: Your vehicle has an interlock thatprevents you from shifting out of P(Park) unless your foot is on the brakepedal.

%*[ST10480( ALL)04/95] If the engine does not start after two attempts:

*[ST10492( ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[ST10494( ALL)04/95] 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floorand hold it.

*[ST10496( ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position.

*[ST10497( ALL)04/95] 4. Release the ignition key when the enginestarts.

*[ST10498( ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as theengine speeds up. Then drive away in thenormal manner.

*[ST10500( ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pumpshut-off switch may have been triggered. Fordirections on how to reset the switch see FuelPump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.

%*[ST11100( ALL)04/95] A computer system controls the engine’s idlespeed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’sidle speed normally runs higher than when it’swarmed up. These faster engine speeds willmake your vehicle move slightly faster than itsnormal idle speed. It should, however, slowdown after a short time. If it does not, have theidle speed checked.


42

*[ST11210( ALL)05/95] If the engine idle speed does not slow downautomatically, do not allow your vehicle to idlefor more than 10 minutes. Have the vehiclechecked.


Extended idling at high engine speeds canproduce very high temperatures in theengine and exhaust system, creating therisk of fire or other damage.


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.

*[ST11300( ALL)03/95] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzerotemperatures, use an engine block heater (ifyour vehicle has this option).

%*[ST11400( ALL)03/95] Engine Block Heater (If equipped)

*[ST11500( ALL)03/95] Engine block heaters are strongly recommendedif you live in a region where temperatures reach-10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heaterwarms the engine coolant, which improvesstarting, warms up the engine faster, and allowsthe heater-defrost system to respond quickly.

*[ST11700( ALL)02/95] To turn the heater on, simply plug it into agrounded 110-volt outlet. Ford recommends thatyou use a 110-volt circuit that is protected by aground fault circuit interrupter.


43


To prevent electrical shock, do not useyour heater with ungrounded electricalsystems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters.

*[ST11900( ALL)03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least threehours before you start your vehicle. Using theheater for longer than three hours will notdamage the engine, so you can plug it in atnight to start your vehicle the followingmorning.

*[ST12000( ALL)12/91] NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the engine blockheater before driving your vehicle.

%*[ST13100( ALL)02/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

*[ST13200( ALL)02/95] Carbon monoxide, although colorless andodorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Takeprecautions to avoid its dangerous effects.


Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or other enclosed area. Never sit ina stopped vehicle for more than a shortperiod of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See GuardingAgainst Exhaust Fumes in this chapter formore instructions.


If you smell exhaust fumes inside yourvehicle, have your dealer inspect yourvehicle immediately. Do not drive if yousmell exhaust fumes.


44

*[ST13500( ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systemschecked whenever:

*[ST13600( ALL)02/95] ❑your vehicle is raised for service

*[ST13700( ALL)02/95] ❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes

*[ST13800( ALL)01/95] ❑your vehicle has been damaged in a collision

*[ST13900( ALL)01/95] Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inletvents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris.

[ST14000( ALL)12/94] If the engine is idling while you are stopped inan open area for long periods of time, open thewindows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, theheating or air conditioning system should be setto any function except MAX A/C or AUTO.

[ST14125( BCGV)05/94] ❑ If you use the heater, set the fan speed onMEDIUM or HIGH with the function controlon any position except OFF and thetemperature control at any desired position.

[ST14250( BCGV)12/88] ❑ If you use the air conditioner, set the fanspeed on MEDIUM or HIGH with thefunction control on any position except OFFor MAX and the temperature control at anydesired position.


45

%*[ST17100( ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks but DoesNot Start or Does Not Start Aftera Collision

%*[ST17110( ALL)04/95] Fuel System Shut-off Switch

*[ST17200( ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or doesnot start after a collision, the fuel system shut-offswitch may have been triggered. The shut-offswitch is a device intended to stop the fuelsystem when your vehicle has been involved ina substantial jolt.

*[ST17400( BCGV)01/95] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you mustreset the switch by hand before you can startyour vehicle. The switch is on the left side of thetrunk.

[ST17900( GV)10/94]

half page art:0010014-D

The fuel system shut-off switch


46


If you see or smell fuel, do not reset theswitch or try to start your vehicle. Haveall the passengers get out of the vehicleand call the local fire department or atowing service.

*[ST18800( ALL)03/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after acollision or substantial jolt:

*[ST18900( ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[ST19000( ALL)03/95] 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.

*[ST19100( ALL)03/95] 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the redreset button down. If the button is alreadyset, you may have a different mechanicalproblem.

*[ST19200( ALL)03/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position fora few seconds, then turn it to the OFFposition.

*[ST19300( ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leakingfuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not startyour vehicle again. If you do not see orsmell fuel, you can try to start your vehicleagain.

*[ST19350( ALL)03/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights beforedriving the vehicle.

*[ST19400( ALL)01/95] Pushing[ST19600( BCGV)03/95] Vehicles with automatic transmissions cannot be

started by pushing. Follow the directions underIf Your Vehicle Needs a Jump-Start.


47

Warning Lights andGauges

*[LG00400( ALL)01/95] The instrument panel (dashboard) on yourvehicle is divided into several different sections.The illustrations on the following pages showthe major parts of the instrument panel that aredescribed in this chapter. Some items shownmay not be on all vehicles.

[LG00500( BCGV)05/94] In your vehicle, the warning lights and gaugesare grouped together in the instrument clusterand the indicator lamp module.

[LG00600( GV)05/94] Your vehicle is equipped with one of thefollowing clusters:

[LG00710( GV)06/92] ❑a mechanical cluster

[LG00950( GV)05/92] ❑an electronic cluster

File:rclgg.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 08:07:51 1996

48

% [LG02450( GV)05/94]

full page art:0010682-I

The mechanical cluster


49

*[LG02700( BCGV)06/94] The Mechanical Cluster

*[LG02800( BCGV)06/93] The following warning lights and gauges are onthe mechanical cluster. All of the warning lightsand gauges alert you to possible problems withyour vehicle. Some of the lights listed areoptional. The following sections detail what eachof these indicators means.

%*[LG02900( ALL)03/95] Brake System Warning Light

*[LG03000( ALL)03/95] The warning light for the brakes can show twothings — that the parking brake is not fullyreleased, or that the brake fluid level is low inthe master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level islow, the brake system should be checked by aqualified service technician.

[LG03035( GV)05/95]

one inch art:0010681-C

[LG03100( ALL)01/95] This light comes on when the parking brake isset, or if it is not set, it comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition key to START. It normallygoes off shortly after the engine starts and yourelease the parking brake. If the light stays onafter you have fully released the parking brake,have the hydraulic brake system serviced.

*[LG03200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The BRAKE light indicates that the brakesmay not be working properly. Have thebrakes checked immediately.


50

% [LG03475( ALL)05/94] Anti-Lock Brake System Light(If equipped)

[LG03500( ALL)05/94] This warning light will go on each time youstart your vehicle. If it remains on for longerthan five seconds, you should shut off yourengine and restart. If the anti-lock brake lightstays on, this indicates that the anti-lock featureis disabled and should receive immediateattention by a qualified service technician.Normal braking is not affected unless the brakewarning light is also lit.

*[LG03505( BCGV)01/95] The Anti-Lock Brake System has self-checkcapabilities. As previously described, the systemturns on the anti-lock light each time you startyour engine. After the engine is started and theanti-lock light is out, the system performsanother test the first time the vehicle reaches14 mph (22 km/h). The system turns on theAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) pump motor forapproximately 1/2 second. At this time amechanical noise may be heard. This is a normalpart of the self-check feature. If a malfunction isfound during this check the anti-lock light willcome on.

[LG03680( ALL)05/95]

one inch art:0011194-B


51

*[LG03700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If the anti-lock brake system warninglight remains on or comes on whiledriving, have the braking system checkedby a qualified service technician as soonas possible.

[LG03800( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-locksystem, and the brake warning light isnot lit, the anti-lock system is disabledbut normal brake function remainsoperational.

%*[LG04300( ALL)04/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime

*[LG04305( ALL)03/95] This warning light and chime remind you tofasten your safety belt. The following conditionswill take place:

*[LG04316( GV)03/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is not buckled whenthe ignition is turned to the ON position, thelight will turn on for 1 to 2 minutes and thechime will sound for 4 to 8 seconds.

*[LG04323( GV)03/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled while thelight is on or the chime is sounding, both thelight and the chime will turn off.

*[LG04327( GV)03/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled before theignition is turned to the ON position, neitherthe light nor the chime will turn on.

[LG04600( ALL)05/92]

one inch art:0010118-A


52

%*[LG04610( ALL)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light

[LG04620( ALL)05/94] The air bag system uses a readiness light toindicate the condition of the system. If thesystem is functioning properly, the light willstay on for 6 seconds when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position.

[LG04630( ALL)05/94] If there is a problem with the system, two thingsmay happen: the readiness light will either flashor stay lit up, or you will hear a beeping sound.If either of these things happen, have the air bagsystem serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer immediately.

[LG04640(M GV)05/95]


%*[LG04700( ALL)01/95] Charging System Light

*[LG04800( ALL)03/95] This light indicates that your battery is not beingcharged and that you need to have the electricalsystem checked.

[LG04900( ALL)05/92]


*[LG05100( ALL)02/95] This light comes on every time you turn theignition to the ON or START position(engine off). The light should go off when theengine starts and the alternator begins to charge.


53

*[LG05200( ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when theengine is running, have the electrical systemchecked as soon as possible.

%*[LG05205( BCGV)05/95] Overdrive Off Indicator

[LG05210( ALL)06/93]


*[LG05220( BCGV)01/95] This light tells you that the Transmission ControlSwitch (TCS) on the gearshift lever has beenpushed. When the light is on, the transmissionwill not shift into overdrive. Depressing thebutton on the shifter will return the vehicle to“overdrive on” mode. The transmission will bein the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle isstarted even if the O/D OFF mode was selectedwhen the vehicle was last shut off.

*[LG05230( ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the light does not come on when theTCS is depressed or if the light flasheswhen you are driving, have yourvehicle serviced at the firstopportunity. If this condition persists,damage could occur to thetransmission.


54

%*[LG07200( ALL)01/95] High Beam Light

*[LG07300( ALL)03/95] This light comes on when the headlamps areturned to high beam or when you flash thelights.

[LG07400( ALL)05/92]


% [LG09200( GV)05/92] Low Fuel Alert Light

[LG09300( GV)03/95] This light comes on when your fuel gaugeindicates between 1/8 and 1/16 of a tank. Yourcar must be turned to ON for this light to comeon.

[LG09405( GV)05/94]



55

% [LG09410( GV)12/91] Air Suspension Light (If equipped)

[LG09420( GV)05/92] This light tells you if the air suspension needsrepair or if the air suspension switch (in thetrunk on the right side) is OFF.

[LG09430( GV)05/92]


[LG09440( GV)05/92] Normally, the light will glow momentarily asyou turn the ignition key to the ON position. Ifit glows continuously:

[LG09450( GV)05/92] 1. Safely pull off the road as soon as possible.Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF andON again.

[LG09460( GV)05/92] 2. If the light still glows, check to see if the airsuspension switch is OFF. If it is OFF, pushthe switch ON. If it is ON, push the switchOFF and have the system checked as soon aspossible.

%*[LG11005( ALL)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light

*[LG11015( ALL)03/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II)system consists of the hardware and softwarenecessary to monitor the operation of thepowertrain. The OBD II system is designed tocheck the function of the vehicle’s powertraincontrol system during normal operation. If anemission problem is detected, the Check EngineWarning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.

*[LG11020( ALL)03/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle maycause incorrect operation of the OBD II system.Additions such as burglar alarms, cellularphones, and CB radios must be carefully


56

installed. Do not install these devices by tappinginto or running wires close to powertrain controlsystem wires or components.

[LG11045( GV)05/94]


*[LG11050( ALL)03/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn theignition key to ON, but it should turn off whenthe engine starts. If the light does not come onwhen you turn the ignition to ON or if it comeson and stays on when you are driving, haveyour vehicle serviced as soon as possible. Thisindicates a possible problem with one of thevehicle’s emission control systems. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed in.

*[LG11055( ALL)04/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) secondintervals while you are driving the vehicle, itmeans that the engine is misfiring. If thiscondition persists, damage could occur to theengine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicleserviced at the first opportunity. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed in.

*[LG11060( ALL)03/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasionswhile you are driving, it means that amalfunction occurred and the condition correcteditself.

*[LG11065( ALL)03/95] An example of a condition which corrects itselfoccurs when an engine running out of fuelbegins to misfire. In this case, the Check EngineWarning Light may turn on and will then set aDiagnostic Trouble Code indicating that theengine was misfiring while the last of the fuelwas being consumed. After refueling, the Check


57

Engine Warning Light will turn off after thevehicle has completed three consecutive warmup cycles without a misfire condition occurring.A warm up cycle consists of engine start from acold condition (engine at ambient temperature)and running until the engine reaches normaloperating temperature.

*[LG11075( ALL)03/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check EngineWarning Light will turn off as soon as theengine begins to crank. It is not necessary tohave the engine serviced.

*[LG11100( BCGV)05/95] Under certain conditions, the Check EngineWarning Light may come on if the fuel cap isnot properly installed. If the Check EngineWarning Light comes on and you suspect thatthe fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off theroad as soon as it is safely possible and turn offthe engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap,making sure it is properly seated.

*[LG11200( ALL)05/95] After completing the three consecutive warm upcycles and on the fourth engine start up, theCheck Engine Warning Light should turn off. Ifthe light does not go off after the fourth enginerestart, have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer or a qualified technician.

%*[LG12910( ALL)04/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights

*[LG12920( ALL)05/95] The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate thedirection in which you are going to be turning.

[LG12950( ALL)06/93]



58

%*[LG13000( ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge

[LG13050( GV)05/95]


The fuel gauge

[LG13100( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge displays approximately howmuch fuel is in the fuel tank only when theignition switch is ON. For proper fuel gaugeindication after adding fuel, turn the ignitionswitch OFF while refueling the vehicle.

[LG13150( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly whenthe vehicle is in motion. The most accuratereading is obtained with the vehicle on levelground.

*[LG13200( ALL)08/93] With ignition switch OFF, the fuel gaugeindicator may drift from the ignition switch ONposition.

%*[LG13400( ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

*[LG13550( ALL)03/95] This gauge indicates the temperature of theengine coolant, not the coolant level. If thecoolant is not at its proper level or mixture, thegauge indication will not be accurate.

[LG13600( ALL)03/94] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark intothe NORMAL band as your engine coolantwarms up. Under normal driving conditions, thepointer should stay in the NORMAL band. It isacceptable for the pointer to fluctuate within theNORMAL band under normal driving


59

conditions, and under certain driving conditionssuch as, heavy stop and go traffic, or driving uphills in hot weather, for the pointer to indicate atthe top of the NORMAL band.

[LG13650( ALL)05/94] If, under any circumstances, the pointer movesabove the NORMAL band, the engine isoverheating and continued operation may causeengine damage.

% [LG13740( GV)05/94]

one third page art:0010697-C

The engine coolant temperature gauge

*[LG14100( ALL)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:

*[LG14200( ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG14300( ALL)01/95] 2. Turn off the engine.

*[LG14400( ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVECOOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTILTHE ENGINE IS COOL.

*[LG14500( ALL)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following theinstructions on checking and adding coolantto your engine, see Engine Coolant in theIndex. If you do not follow theseinstructions, you or others could be injured.

*[LG14600( ALL)01/95] If the coolant continues to overheat, have thecoolant system serviced.


60

%*[LG14800( ALL)01/95] Speedometer

*[LG14900( ALL)01/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving.

%*[LG15000( ALL)01/95] Odometer

*[LG15100( ALL)01/95] The odometer tells you the total number of miles(kilometers) your vehicle has been driven.

%*[LG15200( ALL)11/94] Trip Odometer

*[LG15300( ALL)03/93] If you want to track your mileage up to 999.9miles (kilometers), use the trip odometer. Simplyset the trip odometer to zero by pressing thereset button firmly when beginning the distanceyou wish to measure.

*[LG15350( ALL)01/95] Since the trip odometer displays distanceindependent of the odometer it will not alwaysadvance to the next mile (kilometer) at the sametime as the odometer.

% [LG16220( ALL)05/94] Battery Voltage Gauge (If Equipped)

*[LG16225( ALL)05/94] This gauge shows you the battery voltage whenthe ignition key is in the ON position.

*[LG16230( ALL)05/94] If the battery is operating under cold weatherconditions, the pointer may indicate in the upperrange of the NORMAL band while the battery ischarging. If you are running electrical accessories(when the engine is off, or idling at a lowspeed), the pointer may move toward the lowerend of the NORMAL band.

*[LG16260( ALL)05/94] If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have yourvehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as itis safely possible.


61

[LG16291( GV)05/94]


The battery voltage gauge

%*[LG16300( ALL)05/94] Engine Oil Pressure Gauge[LG16500( ALL)05/94] This gauge indicates the engine oil pressure, not

the oil level. However, if your engine’s oil levelis low, it could affect the oil pressure. With theengine running, the pointer should move intothe NORMAL band. If the pointer drops belowthe NORMAL band while the engine is running,you have lost oil pressure and continuedoperation will cause severe engine damage.

*[LG16600( ALL)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:

*[LG16700( ALL)01/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG16800( ALL)04/95] 2. Shut off the engine immediately or severeengine damage could result.

[LG16900( ALL)05/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following theinstructions on checking and adding engineoil, see the Engine Oil in the Index. If you donot follow these instructions, you or otherscould be injured. To assure an accuratereading, your car should be on level ground.

[LG17000( ALL)05/94] 4. If the level is low, add oil as necessarybefore you start the engine again. Do notoverfill. Do not operate the engine if thepointer is below the NORMAL band,regardless of the oil level. Contact yournearest dealer for further service actions.


62

[LG17200( ALL)05/94] For more information about adding oil, seeEngine Oil Recommendations in the Index.

%*[LG23800( GV)01/95] The Electronic Cluster

*[LG23900( GV)01/95] The electronic cluster works only when yourignition is in the ON position. Each time youstart your vehicle, the displays go through aself-test by flashing on and off once before theactual readings are displayed. (Neither the turnsignals nor the high beam indicator light willflash like the other indicators do for theself-test.) Some of the warning lights will flashon and remain on (will not immediately flashoff) until the normal cluster display is lit. Thisself-test is used to indicate that all of thewarning/indicator lights are working properly.

*[LG24000( GV)01/95] Your electronic cluster tells you about thecondition of your vehicle by using two types ofequipment:

*[LG24100( GV)01/95] ❑warning lights and gauges

*[LG24300( GV)01/95] ❑message center


63

[LG24600( GV)03/94]

full page art:0010150-I

Electronic cluster


64

%*[LG24605( GV)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

% [LG24610( GV)03/94]

one third page art:0010570-B

*[LG24615( GV)01/95] This gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature not the coolant level. If the coolantis not at its proper level or mixture, the gaugeindication will not be accurate. It is identified bya thermometer symbol, an “H” (hot), and a “C”(cold). The “NORMAL” indicates the normaloperating range. The bars will move into thenormal operating range as the engine coolantwarms up. It is acceptable under certain drivingconditions such as, heavy stop and go traffic, ordriving up hills in hot weather, for the gauge toindicate at the top of the NORMAL band.

*[LG24618( GV)05/95] If, under any circumstance, the pointer movesabove the NORMAL band, the temperaturesymbol flashes and a tone will sound to alert thedriver that the engine coolant is overheating andcontinued operation may cause engine damage.

*[LG24620( GV)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:

*[LG24622( GV)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safelypossible.

*[LG24624( GV)03/95] 2. Turn off the engine. If you do not stop theengine as soon as safely possible, severeengine damage could result.


65

*[LG24626( GV)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVECOOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTILTHE ENGINE IS COOL.

*[LG24628( GV)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following theinstructions on checking and adding coolantto your engine, see Engine Coolant in theIndex. If you do not follow theseinstructions, you or others could be injured.

*[LG24630( GV)01/95] If the coolant continues to overheat, have thecoolant system serviced.

*[LG24635( GV)01/95] If only the top two and bottom two bars appearon the gauge, then the system is indicating thatit requires servicing. Contact your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

%*[LG25700( GV)04/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime

*[LG25750( GV)03/95] This warning light and chime remind you tofasten your safety belt. The following conditionswill take place:

*[LG25802( GV)03/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is not buckled whenthe ignition is turned to the ON position, thelight will turn on for 1 to 2 minutes and thechime will sound for 4 to 8 seconds.

*[LG25851( GV)03/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled while thelight is on or the chime is sounding, both thelight and the chime will turn off.

*[LG25901( GV)03/95] ❑ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled before theignition is turned to the ON position, neitherthe light nor the chime will turn on.

[LG26000( GV)06/93]



66

%*[LG27000( GV)01/95] High Beam Light

*[LG27100( GV)03/95] This light comes on when the headlamps areturned to high beam or when you flash thelights.

[LG27200( GV)06/93]


%*[LG27600( GV)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light

*[LG27650( GV)03/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II)system consists of the hardware and softwarenecessary to monitor the operation of thepowertrain. The OBD II system is designed tocheck the function of the vehicle’s powertraincontrol system during normal operation. If anemission problem is detected, the Check EngineWarning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.

*[LG27750( GV)03/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle maycause incorrect operation of the OBD II system.Additions such as burglar alarms, cellularphones, and CB radios must be carefullyinstalled. Do not install these devices by tappinginto or running wires close to powertrain controlsystem wires or components.

[LG27800( GV)06/93]



67

*[LG27810( GV)03/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn theignition key to ON, but it should turn off whenthe engine starts. If the light does not come onwhen you turn the ignition to ON or if it comeson and stays on when you are driving, haveyour vehicle serviced as soon as possible. Thisindicates a possible problem with one of thevehicle’s emission control systems. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed in.

*[LG27815( GV)04/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) secondintervals while you are driving the vehicle, itmeans that the engine is misfiring. If thiscondition persists, damage could occur to theengine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicleserviced at the first opportunity. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed in.

*[LG27820( GV)03/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasionswhile you are driving, it means that amalfunction occurred and the condition correcteditself.

*[LG27825( GV)03/95] An example of a condition which corrects itselfoccurs when an engine running out of fuelbegins to misfire. In this case, the Check EngineWarning Light may turn on and will then set aDiagnostic Trouble Code indicating that theengine was misfiring while the last of the fuelwas being consumed. After refueling, the CheckEngine Warning Light will turn off after thevehicle has completed three consecutive warmup cycles without a misfire condition occurring.A warm up cycle consists of engine start from acold condition (engine at ambient temperature)and running until the engine reaches normaloperating temperature.

*[LG27850( GV)03/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check EngineWarning Light will turn off as soon as theengine begins to crank. It is not necessary tohave the engine serviced.


68

*[LG27900( GV)05/95] Under certain conditions, the Check EngineWarning Light may come on if the fuel cap isnot properly installed. If the Check EngineWarning Light comes on and you suspect thatthe fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off theroad as soon as it is safely possible and turn offthe engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap,making sure it is properly seated.

*[LG27950( GV)05/95] After completing the three consecutive warm upcycles and on the fourth engine start up, theCheck Engine Warning Light should turn off. Ifthe light does not go off after the fourth enginerestart, have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer or a qualified technician.

%*[LG28101( GV)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light

[LG28102( GV)02/93] The Air Bag Readiness light will go on eachtime you start your vehicle and will remain onfor about 6-8 seconds indicating normal air bagoperation. If this light stays on continuously orflashes, or if the light never comes on at all,there is something wrong with the Air BagSupplemental Restraint System and your vehicleshould be taken in for service to the nearestLincoln-Mercury dealer as soon as possible.Unless serviced, the Air Bag SupplementalRestraint System may not function properly inthe event of a collision.

[LG28103( GV)10/90]



69

%*[LG28104( GV)01/95] Charging System Warning Light

*[LG28105( GV)01/95] This light comes on when you turn your ignitionkey from OFF to ON. The light should go outwhen the engine starts and the alternator beginsto charge.

*[LG28106( GV)01/95] If this light stays on or comes on while yourengine is running, this tells you that yourbattery is not being charged and that you needto have the electrical system checked as soon aspossible.

[LG28107( GV)10/90]


%*[LG28108( GV)01/95] Engine Oil Pressure Light

[LG28109( GV)10/90]


[LG28110( GV)06/93] This light indicates the engine oil pressure, notthe oil level. However, if your engine’s oil levelis low, it could affect the oil pressure. The lightshould come on every time your ignition key isturned to ON or START, and should go outwhen the engine starts. If the light stays on orturns on while the engine is running, you havelost oil pressure and continued operation willcause severe engine damage.


70

*[LG28111( GV)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:

*[LG28112( GV)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG28113( GV)01/95] 2. Shut off the engine immediately. If you donot stop the engine as soon as safelypossible, severe engine damage could result.

[LG28114( GV)07/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following theinstructions on checking and adding engineoil, see Engine Oil in the Index. If you donot follow these instructions, you or otherscould be injured. To assure an accuratereading, your vehicle should be on levelground.

[LG28115( GV)06/93] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil asnecessary before you start the engine again.Do not overfill. Do not operate the engine ifthe light is on, regardless of the oil level.Contact your nearest dealer for service assoon as possible.

*[LG28117( GV)01/95] For more information about adding oil, seeAdding engine oil in the Servicing Your Vehiclechapter of this guide.

%*[LG28120( GV)04/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights

*[LG28122( GV)05/95] The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate thedirection in which you are going to be turning.

[LG28137( GV)06/93]



71

%*[LG28140( GV)01/95] Speed Control Indicator Light

*[LG28150( GV)01/95] This light comes on when the speed controlsystem is actively maintaining the set speed. Itwill go off when the brakes are used or if thespeed control is turned off.

[LG28160( GV)10/90]


*[LG28170( GV)01/95] This light does not indicate any problems but isonly a convenience to tell when the speedcontrol is active.

%*[LG29700( GV)01/95] Fuel Gauge

[LG30810( GV)03/94]


[LG30860( GV)03/95] The fuel gauge tells you approximately howmany gallons/liters of fuel you have in the tank.

[LG30870( GV)03/93] When your tank reaches 1/8 or approximately2 gallons (8 liters), a flashing fuel pump willappear.

[LG30880( GV)03/92] Turn the ignition switch off while fueling toobtain an accurate fuel gauge indication.


72

[LG30885( GV)05/94] NOTE: At least 2.5 gallons (9.5 liters) of fuelmust be added for the fuel gauge toimmediately show the new level offuel. If less than 2.5 gallons (9.5 liters)of fuel is added, the gauge will reachthe new level slowly.

[LG30890( GV)10/90] If the fuel gauge displays only the top two barsand the bottom two bars, or, if fuel remaining ordistance to empty functions display CO or CS,then there is a problem. Take your vehicle in forservice.

[LG30900( GV)03/92] When you turn the ignition key to the ON orACC position, all the display segments will lightup, then go off for a second indicating the gaugeis working. Then the gauge will show you howmuch fuel you have in the tank.

%*[LG31000( GV)01/95] FUEL REMAIN — Fuel Remaining

[LG31100( GV)05/95]


*[LG31200( GV)01/95] This function shows you how many gallons(liters) of fuel you have left in the fuel tank.

[LG31300( GV)03/94] If your fuel level is above 20 gallons (76 liters),the letter “F” (full) will appear on the display.But if your fuel level has dropped to below1 gallon (4 liters), the letter “E” (empty) willappear in the display.

*[LG31400( GV)01/95] Because of factors like rounding of numbers andfuel movement in the tank, your fuel gauge andthe service station fuel pump readings maydisagree slightly.


73

*[LG31500( GV)01/95] A problem is indicated if the fuel gauge bargraph displays only the top two and bottom twobars and the message center display for DistanceTo Empty or Fuel Remaining functions displaythe letters “CO” or “CS”. If this happens, contactyour dealer for service as soon as possible.

%*[LG33600( GV)01/95] Speedometer

[LG33700( GV)05/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving. Itindicates the speed up to 120 mph or up to195 km/h.

*[LG34000( GV)01/95] You can press the E/M (English/Metric) buttonlocated just below the message center display toshow the speed you are going in either milesper hour or kilometers per hour.

[LG34050( GV)05/95]

quarter page art:0010517-D

%*[LG34100( GV)01/95] Odometer

*[LG34200( GV)01/95] The odometer tells you the total number of milesor kilometers your vehicle has been driven. Ifthe cluster is replaced, and the accumulatedmileage on the odometer is unknown, thereplacement cluster will have the circled “S”illuminated with zero miles on the odometer. Ifthe actual vehicle mileage can be verified, thenan authorized service center can program theactual mileage into the odometer of thereplacement cluster. The actual mileage (ifknown) or an estimated mileage (if unknown) isshown on a label affixed on the door pillar.


74

*[LG34410( GV)01/95] Press the E/M (English/Metric) button locatedjust below the message center display to showmiles or kilometers.

*[LG34420( GV)01/95] If the odometer displays the word “ERROR”contact your dealer for service.

%*[LG46700( GV)04/95] The Electronic Message Center(If equipped)

*[LG46800( GV)01/95] Along with information the warning lights andgauges provide, the electronic message centerlets you:

*[LG47000( GV)01/95] ❑ see problems such as Door Ajar, AirSuspension, Trunk Ajar, Washer Fluid

*[LG47100( GV)01/95] ❑ see how many miles/kilometers you candrive with the fuel remaining in your tank

[LG47200( GV)05/94] ❑ see when overdrive has been turned off

*[LG47300( GV)01/95] ❑monitor your average fuel economy

*[LG47400( GV)01/95] ❑monitor your instantaneous fuel economy

*[LG47600( GV)01/95] ❑check the distance you have travelled duringa trip on either Trip A or Trip B

*[LG47700( GV)01/95] ❑monitor your average speed

[LG47900( GV)05/95]

one third page art:0010518-H

Message center display showing all segments on


75

% [LG48000( GV)10/90] All of the message center functions arecontrolled by the three switches located justbelow the message center display:

[LG48030( GV)02/94] ❑E/M — Changes the electronic instrumentcluster display to read in either English orMetric units.

*[LG48060( GV)01/95] ❑Reset — Sets the selected function to zero(if resettable).

*[LG48100( GV)01/95] ❑Select — Selects the function. This is a dualaction switch, the right side advances functionto the right, the left side advances function tothe left.

[LG48130( GV)03/94]


Buttons for the message center

*[LG48160( GV)01/95] How to use the message center

*[LG48200( GV)01/95] To reset any function:

*[LG48260( GV)01/95] 1. Push either the right or left side of theSELECT button to choose the function youwould like to set.

*[LG48300( GV)01/95] 2. Push the RESET button and the selectedmessage center function will be reset to zero.(The only functions which can be reset tozero are: AVG ECON, TRIP A or TRIP B,and AVG SPEED.)


76

*[LG48350( GV)01/95] What the message center functions canshow you

%*[LG48400( GV)01/95] DIST TO EMPTY — Distance to Empty(DTE)

[LG48450( GV)05/95]


Message center display showing the DTE function selected

*[LG48500( GV)01/95] This function estimates how many miles orkilometers you can drive with the fuel remainingin your tank under standard driving conditions.

*[LG48600( GV)01/95] Remember to turn off the ignition when fillingup with fuel. Otherwise, the display will notshow the addition of fuel for a few miles.

[LG48625( GV)05/94] NOTE: At least 2.5 gallons (9.5 liters) of fuelmust be added for the fuel gauge toimediately show the new level of fuel.

*[LG48650( GV)01/95] When you have approximately 50 miles (80 km)left before you run out of fuel, the DTE functionwill flash for five (5) seconds and sound a tonefor one (1) second. The message center willremain in the DTE function until you push theselect button to change it. This low fuel warningalso happens at 25 miles (40 km), and 10 miles(16 km).


77

*[LG48675( GV)01/95] Displayed DTE will not be equal to AVG ECONmultiplied by the FUEL REMAIN value. This isbecause DTE is calculated using a method thattakes into consideration the fuel economy of thelast 500 miles (800 Km) driven.

[LG48700( GV)03/91]


*[LG48800( GV)01/95] If “CO” or “CS” is displayed, this means thatthere is a problem with the fuel indicationsystem and you should contact your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

%*[LG50000( GV)01/95] AVG ECON — Average Fuel Economy

*[LG50100( GV)01/95] Select this function to display your average fueleconomy in miles per gallon or liters per100 kilometers. Your message center computesthis figure using the distance traveled and fuelused information. If you want to reset thisfunction, press the RESET button while theaverage fuel economy feature is displayed.

[LG50150( GV)03/95] The average shown is the average since thereset.

[LG50200( GV)10/90]



78

*[LG50300( GV)01/95] If you calculate your average fuel economy bydividing miles traveled by gallons used, yourfigure may be different than displayed becauseof:

*[LG50400( GV)01/95] ❑Your vehicle not being perfectly level duringfill-up

*[LG50500( GV)01/95] ❑Differences in the automatic shut-off pointson the fuel pumps at service stations

*[LG50600( GV)01/95] ❑Variations in top-off procedure from onefill-up to another

*[LG50700( GV)01/95] ❑Rounding of the displayed values to thenearest 0.1 gallon (liters) on the fuel gauge.

%*[LG50800( GV)01/95] INST ECON — Instantaneous FuelEconomy

*[LG50900( GV)01/95] Select this function to calculate yourinstantaneous fuel economy. Your instantaneousfuel economy is the fuel economy you get at anyparticular moment. For example, you can seewhat your fuel economy is in heavy traffic or onan open highway.

[LG51000( GV)10/90]


*[LG51100( GV)01/95] Your vehicle must be moving to calculate fueleconomy. When your vehicle is not moving,instantaneous fuel economy is displayed at0 miles per gallon or 99 liters per100 kilometers. When you are moving, thedisplay may read anything between 0 and 99miles/gallon (1 to 99 L/km). Instantaneous fueleconomy cannot be reset.


79

%*[LG51200( GV)01/95] TRIP A and TRIP B — Elapsed DistanceTraveled

*[LG51300( GV)01/95] These two functions of the message center allowyou to see how far you have traveled since youlast reset. Trip A and Trip B are completelyindependent and must be reset individually.

[LG51400( GV)10/90]


*[LG51500( GV)01/95] To reset either trip feature to zero, press theRESET button while a trip distance feature(Trip A or Trip B) is displayed.

[LG51600( GV)05/94] AVG SPEED — Average Speed

[LG51700( GV)05/94] Select this function to display your averagespeed in miles per hour or kilometers per hour.

[LG51800( GV)05/94]


[LG51900( GV)05/94] Your vehicle must be moving to calculate youraverage speed. When your vehicle is notmoving, the average speed is displayed at0 miles per hour or 0 kilometers per hour.


80

[LG52200( GV)05/95] Check Air Suspension Light

*[LG52300( GV)01/95] This light glows momentarily when the ignitionis turned to the ON position. With the ignitionon this light will flash five (5) times and sound atone for one (1) second, and then the light willremain on to indicate that the air suspensionswitch (located in the trunk on the right side) isoff or to indicate a possible system fault.

*[LG52400( GV)01/95] If the light is displayed while driving and theair suspension switch is not turned off, safelypull off the road as soon as possible. Turn theignition switch from ON to OFF and to ONagain. If the light continues to be displayed afterflashing five (5) times, turn the air suspensionswitch (located in the trunk on the right side) offand take your vehicle to a dealership for serviceas soon as possible.

[LG52500( GV)10/90]



81

%*[LG52550( GV)05/95] Overdrive Off Indicator

[LG52560( GV)06/92]


*[LG52570( GV)01/95] This light tells you that the Transmission ControlSwitch (TCS) on the gearshift lever has beenpushed. When the light is on, the transmissionwill not shift into overdrive. Depressing thebutton on the shifter will return the vehicle to“overdrive on” mode. The transmission will bein the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle isstarted even if the O/D OFF mode was selectedwhen the vehicle was last shut off.

*[LG52571( GV)04/95] NOTE: If the light does not come on when theTCS is depressed or if the light flasheswhen you are driving, have yourvehicle serviced at the firstopportunity. If this condition persists,damage could occur to thetransmission.

%*[LG52600( GV)01/95] Low Washer Fluid Light

*[LG52700( GV)01/95] This light comes on when there is less than aquarter of the container of washer fluid left.With the ignition ON this light will flash five (5)times and a tone will sound for one (1) second,and then the light will remain on.

[LG52800( GV)05/94]



82

%*[LG52900( GV)01/95] Door Ajar Light

*[LG53000( GV)01/95] If one of the doors is not completely shut, thislight comes on when you turn the ignition toON. With the ignition on this light will flashfive (5) times and sound a tone for one (1)second, and then the light will remain on.

[LG53100( GV)10/90]


%*[LG53200( GV)01/95] Trunk Ajar Light

*[LG53300( GV)01/95] If the trunk is not completely closed, this lightcomes on when you turn the ignition to ON.With the ignition ON this light will flash five (5)times and sound a tone for one (1) second, andthen the light will remain on.

[LG53400( GV)05/94]



83

[LG53500( GV)07/93] Indicator Lamp Module[LG53600( GV)05/94] The following warning lights are on the

indicator lamp module. The following sectiondetails what each of these indicators mean.

[LG53700( GV)05/94]


The indicator lamp module

% [LG53800( GV)05/94] Anti-Theft System Light (If equipped)

[LG53900( GV)05/94] The anti-theft system light illuminates to remindyou that the anti-theft system has been activated.The indicator light remains on steadily forapproximately 30 seconds after the last door isclosed, and then goes out.

[LG54000( GV)05/94]



84

% [LG54200( GV)05/94] Anti-Lock Brake System Light(If equipped)

*[LG54300( GV)01/95] This warning light will go on each time youstart your vehicle. If it remains on for longerthan 5 seconds, you should shut off your engineand restart. If the anti-lock brake light stays on,this indicates that the anti-lock feature isdisabled and should receive immediate attentionby a qualified service technician. Normal brakingis not affected unless the brake warning light isalso lit.

*[LG54400( GV)01/95] The Anti-Lock Brake System has self-checkcapabilities. As previously described, the systemturns on the anti-lock light each time you startyour engine. After the engine is started and theanti-lock light is out, the system performsanother test the first time the vehicle reaches14 mph (22 km/h). The system turns on theAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) pump motor forapproximately 1/2 second. At this time amechanical noise may be heard. This is a normalpart of the self-check feature. If a malfunction isfound during this check the anti-lock light willcome on.

[LG54500( GV)05/94]

one inch art:0010642-E


85

*[LG54550( GV)05/95] RWARNING

If the anti-lock brake system warninglight remains on or comes on whiledriving, have the braking system checkedby a qualified service technician as soonas possible.

[LG54555( GV)05/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-locksystem, and the brake warning light isnot lit, the anti-lock system is disabledbut normal brake function remainsoperational.

%*[LG54560( GV)03/95] Brake System Light

*[LG54570( GV)03/95] The warning light for the brakes can show twothings — that the parking brake is not fullyreleased, or that the brake fluid level is low inthe master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level islow, the brake system should be checked by aqualified service technician.

[LG54580( GV)05/94]



86

*[LG54590( GV)01/95] This light comes on briefly when you turn theignition key to ON, but it normally goes offshortly after the engine starts and you releasethe parking brake. If the light stays on or comeson after you have released the parking brakefully, have the hydraulic brake system serviced.

*[LG55000( GV)05/95] RWARNING

The BRAKE light indicates that the brakesmay not be working properly. Have thebrakes checked immediately.

% [LG55100( GV)05/94] Hazard Warning Light

[LG55200( GV)05/94] The hazard warning light will blink on and offcontinuously when you use the hazard flasher.See Using the Hazard Flasher in the SteeringColumn Controls section.

[LG55300( GV)05/94]



87

Instrument Panel Controls

[IP00280( G )05/94]

full page art:0010102-H

Grand Marquis instrument panel

File:rcipg.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 08:05:49 1996

88

[IP00400( ALL)05/95] The main controls for the climate control system,clock, and radio are on the instrument panel.

%*[IP00500( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases thegloss (shine) of the upper part of theinstrument panel should be avoided.The dull finish in this area is to helpprotect the driver from undesirablewindshield reflection.

%*[IP00600( ALL)01/95] The Climate Control Systems[IP00700( ALL)03/91] Your vehicle has one of two different climate

control systems. The two systems are:

[IP01200( BCGV)06/93] ❑a manual heating and air conditioning system

[IP01300( GV)03/94] ❑an electronic automatic temperature controlsystem

*[IP01400( ALL)09/89] If you are not sure which system your vehiclehas, see the diagrams on the following pages.

% [IP10700( BCGV)08/93] The Manual Heating and Air ConditioningSystem

[IP10800( BCGV)08/93] You can heat the inside of your vehicle, defrostthe windshield, and turn on the air conditioningwith the three knobs in the center of theinstrument panel:

[IP10900( BCGV)08/93] ❑FAN

[IP11000( BCGV)08/93] ❑TEMP

[IP11100( BCGV)08/93] ❑SELECT


89

[IP11200( GV)05/95]

one third page art:0010621-D

The controls for the manual heating and air conditioningsystem

[IP11400( GV)05/94] For maximum heating, move the SELECT knobto FLOOR, move the TEMP knob to the end ofthe red range (full clockwise) and move the fanspeed to HI.

% [IP11601( GV)05/94] To heat the interior of your vehicle and defrostthe windshield at the same time, move theSELECT knob to MIX and select the temperatureand fan speed desired.

[IP11800( GV)05/94] For maximum defrosting, move the SELECTknob to DEFROST V, move the temperature tothe end of the red range (full clockwise) andoperate the fan as necessary to provide thevolume of air required.

% [IP12000( GV)05/94] For ventilation, move the SELECT knob to VENTand select the temperature and blower speeddesired.

[IP12200( GV)05/94] To cool the inside of your vehicle quickly, inwarm weather, move the SELECT knob to MAXA/C, move the TEMP knob to the end of theblue range (full counterclockwise) and move thefan to HI.

[IP12400( GV)03/92] If the inside of the vehicle is very warm, drivefor the first few minutes with the windows opento force the hot, stale air out of the vehicle.


90

[IP12600( GV)03/94] Fan speed can be reduced, after a comfortabletemperature has been reached, to provide quietersystem operation.

[IP12800( GV)05/94] To cool your vehicle using outside air, move theSELECT knob to NORM A/C, move the TEMPknob to the end of the blue range (fullcounterclockwise) and set the fan to the desiredspeed. Cooling your vehicle in this way providesquieter operation, but it is not as economical asMAX A/C.

[IP13000( GV)03/92] The instrument panel registers may be adjustedto control the quantity and direction of air beingdischarged. The thumbwheel controls the volumeof air and the knob in the center of the registerdirects the air up and down or side to side.

[IP13200( GV)05/94] When the SELECT knob is moved to OFF, thesystem is off and the fan will not operate.

% [IP13300( BCGV)01/89] Adjusting the panel register airflow

[IP13400( BCGV)03/92] The instrument panel registers may be adjustedto your comfort needs. The thumbwheel controlsthe volume of air and the knob in the center ofthe register controls direction up or down orside to side.

%*[IP15900( GV)04/95] Electronic Automatic Temperature ControlSystem

*[IP16000( GV)05/95] The control for your Electronic AutomaticTemperature Control (EATC) is located at thecenter of the instrument panel and operates onlywhen the key is in the ON position.

*[IP16100( GV)05/95] The EATC feature maintains the temperatureyou select and automatically controls the airflowfor your comfort. It also allows you to overridethe automatic operation with manual overridebuttons.


91

[IP16200( GV)03/95]


The controls for the electronic automatic temperaturecontrol

*[IP16300( GV)02/95] To turn your EATC on, push the AUTOMATICbutton or any of the six override buttons alongthe bottom of the control.

*[IP16400( GV)02/95] To turn your EATC off, press the OFF button.When the system is off, the display window willbe blank (dark) except when OUTSIDE TEMPhas been selected. Then, OUTSIDE TEMP andthe temperature will appear in the window.

*[IP16500( GV)01/95] If you select AUTOMATIC, the system willautomatically determine fan speed and airflowlocation. If an override button is selected, yourselection determines airflow location only. Fanspeed remains automatic unless you override itby rotating the vertical thumbwheel located atthe extreme right of the control panel.


92

*[IP16600( GV)02/95] To change the temperature in the displaywindow, select any temperature between 65˚F(18˚C) and 85˚F (29˚C) using the BLUE (cooler)or RED (warmer) buttons. The ElectronicAutomatic Temperature Control will do the rest.

*[IP16700( GV)02/95] If you want continuous maximum cooling, pushthe BLUE button until 60˚F (16˚C) is shown inthe display window. Your EATC will cool atmaximum and disregard the 60˚F (16˚C) settinguntil you select a warmer temperature with theRED button. If you want continuous maximumheating, push the RED button until 90˚F (32˚C)is shown in the display window. Your EATCwill provide maximum heat regardless of the90˚F (32˚C) setting until you select a coolertemperature with the BLUE button.

[IP16800( GV)05/94]


*[IP16900( GV)03/95] The display window tells you how the system isoperating. It will indicate the selectedtemperature and the operating function youhave chosen; AUTO or one of the six manualoverrides. It will also indicate manual(thumbwheel) control of the fan speed with theH symbol. The display window with all possibledisplays and their positions are shown here.Normally not all are shown at the same time butare included here to familiarize you with thenames and symbols.


93

*[IP17000( GV)01/95] Automatic operation

*[IP17100( GV)02/95] Push the AUTOMATIC button and select thedesired temperature. The selected temperatureand AUTO will be shown in the displaywindow. The EATC will automatically heat orcool to achieve the set temperature. Undernormal conditions, your EATC will need noadditional attention.

[IP17200( GV)05/95]

quarter page art:0011301-C

*[IP17300( GV)02/95] When in AUTOMATIC and weather conditionsrequire heat, air will be sent to the floor. But, afeature is included in your EATC to preventblowing cold air to the floor if the enginecoolant is not warm enough to allow heating.For a short time the fan will be at low speedand air directed to the windshield. In 3-1/2minutes or less, the fan speed will start toincrease and the airflow will change to the floorarea.

*[IP17400( GV)02/95] If unusual conditions exist (i.e., window fogging,etc.), the six manual override buttons allow youto select special air discharge locations. Athumbwheel allows you to adjust the fan speedto suit your needs.


94

*[IP17500( GV)03/95] Temperature selection

*[IP17600( GV)05/95] The RED and BLUE buttons at the upper left ofthe Control are for temperature selection. TheRED button will increase the set temperatureand the BLUE button will lower the settemperature. Pressing a button and releasing itwill change the set temperature one degree.Holding either button in will rapidly change thetemperature setting in one degree increments toeither 65˚F (18˚C) (BLUE) or 85˚F (29˚C)(RED).Then, the set temperature will jump 5˚ and stopat either 60˚F (16˚C) which is maximum coolingor 90˚F (32˚C) which is maximum heating.

[IP17700( GV)03/95]


*[IP17800( GV)06/94] The average temperature range used is between68˚F (20˚C) and 78˚F (26˚C). Changing thetemperature setting by several degrees outsidethis range will not speed up the heating orcooling process.


95

*[IP17900( GV)01/95] Temperature display

*[IP18000( GV)01/95] The selected temperature displayed in thewindow can be set for either 0˚F or 0˚C. Yourcar may have an English/Metric (E/M) Buttonto change your speedometer from miles tokilometers. When pressed, this button alsochanges the temperature display. With orwithout an E/M Button, the temperature displaycan also be changed to 0˚F or 0˚C using theMAX A/C and DEFrost override buttons.

[IP18100( GV)05/95]


*[IP18201( GV)01/95] To change the temperature display to 0˚F or 0˚C,press and hold the MAX A/C and DEF Buttonsat the same time for 3/4 second. The displaywill change. If you continue to press the twobuttons, the display will continuously switchbetween 0˚F and 0˚C. If the temperature displaydoes not agree with the speedometer on vehicleswith an E/M button, pressing the E/M buttonwill make them agree.


96

*[IP18301( GV)01/95] Fan speed and thumbwheel

*[IP18401( GV)02/95] Your EATC automatically adjusts the fan speedto the existing conditions. You must pushAUTOMATIC for automatic fan speed operation.To control the fan speed yourself, use thethumbwheel which will cancel the automatic fanspeed control. The thumbwheel is located at theextreme right side of the EATC control panel. Itis a vertical control marked with a fan symbol.Rotate up for HI and down for LO speeds.

[IP18501( GV)03/95]


*[IP18601( GV)03/95] When you move the thumbwheel, the fan speedwill go to manual control. The display windowwill show the H symbol in the lower rightcorner along with the selected temperature andoperating function.

[IP18701( GV)05/95]



97

*[IP18801( GV)02/95] You can override the fan speed at any time. Ifyou use the thumbwheel to override the fanspeed, the EATC will continue to control thetemperature but you control the fan speed. Toreturn to auto fan control, press theAUTOMATIC button. If you are operating inone of the override functions (FLOOR, MAXA/C, etc.), automatic fan control will continueunless you rotate the fan thumbwheel. To returnto automatic fan control, press the AUTOMATICbutton. The EATC will return to Automaticoperation. If you want to return to any overridefunction, press the button for that function. Thefan speed will continue to be automaticallycontrolled.

*[IP18901( GV)01/95] Manual override buttons

*[IP19001( GV)02/95] Your EATC has six buttons which allow you tomake special selections. The buttons are locatedalong the bottom edge of the EATC control andallow you to determine where the air will bedischarged. Pressing any override buttonchanges the air discharge location only. It doesnot affect the ability of the system to controltemperature or the fan speed. Return to fullyAutomatic operation by pushing theAUTOMATIC button.

*[IP19101( GV)01/95] MAX A/C button

[IP19201( GV)05/94] The MAX A/C feature allows for faster coolingbecause air is drawn from inside the car. Usinginside air causes the fan to sound louder whichis normal for this selection. The Display windowwill indicate MAX A/C under the selectedtemperature. The airflow will be from theinstrument panel registers.


98

*[IP19301( GV)01/95] NORM A/C button

*[IP19400( GV)01/95] When you push this button, you select airconditioning using outside air. The Displaywindow will indicate A/C under the selectedtemperature. The cooled air will flow from theinstrument panel registers. The fan speed willcontinue on automatic.

%*[IP19500( GV)01/95] VENT button

[IP19600( GV)03/95] Push this button to select outside air through theinstrument panel registers. The display windowwill show the set temperature and VENT to thelower right of the temperature. Your EATC willheat the air if the temperature you have selectedis warmer than the outside air coming into thevehicle. However, the air will NOT be cooledregardless of the temperature setting. Airflowwill be from the instrument panel registers.

*[IP19700( GV)02/95] FLOOR button

*[IP19800( GV)05/95] Airflow will be to the floor when the FLOORbutton is pressed. The display window willshow the set temperature and FLR to the left ofthe temperature. The air cannot be cooled in theFLOOR position, only heated. Fan speed will beautomatic unless manually controlled. If youoverride the fan speed and wish to return toautomatic fan control, push AUTOMATIC. Then,again select FLOOR for airflow to the floor.

%*[IP19900( GV)02/95] FLR & DEF button

[IP20000( GV)03/95] Push this button to get air to the floor andwindshield defrosters at the same time. Thedisplay will show the set temperature, FLR andthe Defrost symbol V to indicate FLR-DEF hasbeen selected. If the outside temperature is about50˚F (10˚C) and above, the air will bedehumidified to remove moisture. This will helpto prevent fogging in humid weather.


99

*[IP20100( GV)02/95] DEF V button

[IP20200( GV)03/95] Press the DEF V button to obtain maximumairflow to the windshield. Adjust thetemperature setting as required for defrosting.The Display window will show the temperaturesetting with the defrost symbol V to the left ofthe temperature. When the outside temperatureis about 50˚F (10˚C) and above, the air will bedehumidified to remove moisture. This will helpprevent fogging in humid weather.

*[IP20300( GV)04/95] OUTSIDE TEMP button

*[IP20400( GV)01/95] By pressing this button the temperature of theair outside of the vehicle will show in thedisplay. The outside temperature will continue tobe displayed until the OUTSIDE TEMP button ispressed again to cancel. If the selectedtemperature setting is changed while the outsidetemperature is displayed, the new selectedtemperature will be displayed for 4 seconds afterit is changed. Then, the outside temperature willreturn to the window. If a manual override ispressed or the thumbwheel is rotated while theoutside temperature is displayed, the windowwill show the change for 4 seconds. Then, theoutside temperature will return along with thechanged override selection.

[IP20500( GV)05/95]



100

*[IP20600( GV)02/95] If the EATC is turned OFF while the outsidetemperature is displayed, the temperature willcontinue to be displayed. Press the OUTSIDETEMP button to clear the display window. Whenthe ignition key is turned OFF the display willbe blank (dark).

*[IP20700( GV)01/95] NOTE: The outside temperature reading ismost accurate when the vehicle ismoving. Higher readings may beobtained when the vehicle is notmoving. The readings that you get maynot agree with temperatures given onthe radio due to differences in vehicleand station locations.

*[IP20800( GV)04/95] Operating tips

*[IP20900( GV)04/95] The following tips will help you to get the mostsatisfaction from your Electronic AutomaticTemperature Control system.

*[IP21000( GV)02/95] ❑ In humid weather, select DEF V beforestarting your engine. This will help toprevent windshield fogging. After a fewminutes of operation, switch to AUTOMATICor an override selection of your choice.

*[IP21100( GV)04/95] ❑To prevent humidity buildup inside yourvehicle, always drive with the EATC Systemturned on.

*[IP21200( GV)03/95] ❑Do not put objects under the front seats thatinterfere with the flow of air to the back seatarea.

*[IP21300( GV)04/95] ❑Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the airintake area of your EATC System whichcould block the air intake. The intake area islocated at the bottom of the windshield,under the hood at the passenger side rearcorner.


101

*[IP21400( GV)04/95] Service

*[IP21500( GV)04/95] If your EATC is not operating as described here,take it to your dealer to have it checked. Systemdiagnostics are built in which will allow yourdealer to readily identify problems that mightoccur.

% [IP31800( GV)12/91] Rear Window Defroster

*[IP32000( ALL)12/91] The defroster for the rear window clears frost,fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outsideof the rear window.

[IP32800( GV)03/94] The button for the rear window defroster islocated on the left hand (driver’s) side of theinstrument panel.

[IP32900( GV)05/94]

one third page art:0010191-F

The button that controls the rear window defroster

[IP33000( ALL)12/94] Clear away any snow that is on the rearwindow before using the defroster. With theengine running, push the defrost button.

[IP33100( ALL)12/94] After approximately 10 minutes, the defrosterwill turn off. If the window is still not clear,turn the defroster on again.

[IP33200( ALL)12/94] The defroster will turn off when the ignition keyis turned to the OFF position.


102

*[IP33300( ALL)02/95] The heating elements are bonded to the inside ofthe rear window. Do not use sharp objects toscrape the inside of the rear window or useabrasive cleaners to clean it. Doing so coulddamage the heating elements.

%*[IP34200( ALL)01/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights%*[IP34310( ALL)01/95] Daytime Running Light System

*[IP34312( ALL)03/95] (Canadian vehicles only)

*[IP34320( ALL)03/95] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turnsthe high beam headlamps on, with a reducedlight output, when:

*[IP34325( ALL)03/95] ❑The headlamp system is in the OFF position,and

*[IP34330( ALL)03/95] ❑The vehicle is running, and

*[IP34340( ALL)01/95] ❑The vehicle has a fully released parkingbrake.

*[IP34360( BCGV)01/95] NOTE: If you have a vehicle with anautomatic lighting system, the DRLsystem is active until the automaticsystem turns on the headlamps.

*[IP34363( ALL)10/94] NOTE: The high beam indicator will not turnon in the flash-to-pass mode duringnighttime driving.

*[IP34365( ALL)01/95] NOTE: You may notice that the lights flickerwhen the vehicle is turned on or off.This is a normal condition.

*[IP34367( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemwill not illuminate the tail lamps andparking lamps. Turn on your headlampsat dusk. Failure to do so may result in acollision.


103

%*[IP34370( ALL)01/95] Turning On the Exterior Lights

*[IP34550( BCGV)05/95] To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, sidemarkers, and tail lamps, use the rotary knob thatis to the left of the steering wheel.

[IP35100( GV)05/95]

one third page art:0010197-H

The knob that controls the headlamps and parking lamps

[IP35200( ALL)12/91] When you turn on the headlamps, the parkinglamps, tail lamps, and side markersautomatically turn on. But you can turn on theparking lamps, tail lamps, and side markerswithout turning on the headlamps.

*[IP36100( ALL)01/95] For more information about how the high beamswork, refer to the Steering Column Controlschapter.

[IP36130( BCGV)05/95] Chime for headlamps on

*[IP36160( BCGV)05/95] This chime sounds if the driver or any passengerdoor is open when the parking lamps orheadlamps are on. The chime sounds until youclose the door, turn off the lamps or turn theignition to the ON position.

%*[IP36200( ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

*[IP36300( ALL)05/95] Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solventsor abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as thesemay cause scratches or crack the lamps.


104

%*[IP36800( GV)01/95] Setting the Autolamp On/Off DelaySystem

*[IP37100( BCGV)02/95] The autolamp sets the headlamps to turn on andoff automatically. You can use the autolamp to:

*[IP37300( BCGV)01/95] ❑ turn on the lamps automatically at night

*[IP37400( BCGV)01/95] ❑ turn off the lamps automatically duringdaylight

*[IP37500( BCGV)01/95] ❑keep the lamps on for up to three minutesafter you turn the key to OFF.

[IP37800( GV)05/95]

one third page art:0010198-F

The autolamp system on the left side of the instrumentpanel

[IP38250( GV)05/95] To activate the autolamp feature, simply turn theheadlamp knob counterclockwise towards theautolamp delay area. The autolampautomatically turns the lamps on and off foryou.


105

*[IP39275( BCGV)01/95] Do not put any articles on top of the photocellthat is located in the top left corner of theinstrument panel. This photocell controls theautolamp. If you cover it, the photocell reacts asif it is nighttime, and the lamps turn on.

[IP39401( GV)05/95] You can adjust the autolamp to keep the lampson after you leave your vehicle. The further youmove the headlamp knob to the left(counterclockwise), the longer the lamps stay on.

*[IP39500( BCGV)12/92] You can set the autolamp so the lamps stay onfor up to three minutes after you turn yourvehicle off.


106

%*[IP44500( ALL)01/95] Lighting Up the Interior and InstrumentPanel

[IP45000( GV)05/95] With the parking lamps or headlampsilluminated, you can brighten or dim the lightsin the instrument panel. To do this, locate theswitch above the headlight control knob andpress it up (to brighten the lights) or down (todim the lights). To turn the interior lights onand off, push the headlamp knob in.

[IP45200( GV)05/95]


The knob controls the light on the instrument panel andthe interior light (autolamp feature shown — other modelssimilar)


107

[IP45450( BCGV)07/93] Using the Automatic Illuminated EntrySystem (If equipped)

[IP45650( GV)03/91] The interior lights will illuminate forapproximately 25 seconds when either front doorhandle is lifted, any button on the keyless entrypad is pressed, or the remote entry systemUNLOCK button is pushed. If the amount oflight outside your vehicle is below apredetermined level, the exterior lights will alsoilluminate.

[IP45900( BCGV)01/89] These lights automatically turn off after 25seconds or when you turn the ignition key toON or ACC. The inside lights will not turn off ifyou have turned them on manually or if a dooris open.

[IP46000( BCGV)01/89] Tips on the illuminated entry system:

[IP46100( BCGV)01/89] ❑The illuminated entry timer will not turn offthe courtesy lamp if that lamp has beenturned on manually or by the door switch.

[IP46200( BCGV)01/89] ❑Occasionally, you will need to clean the lensof the door lock assembly. Use FordMulti-Purpose Cleaner Concentrate, a mildsoap, or household ammonia and watersolution. Apply with a soft cloth or cottonswab, followed by a clear water rinse.


108

%*[IP46300( ALL)01/95] Turning on the Map and Reading Lamps

*[IP46425( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle has two map lamps for thepassenger and the driver. To turn on the maplamps, push the switch next to each lamp.

[IP47000( GV)06/93]


Front seat map and dome lamps

*[IP47010( ALL)01/95] The dual beam map lamps are located on eachside of the dome lamp. Each map lamp can beturned on by the switches on the lamp.


109

% [IP47020( G )05/94] Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps(If equipped)

[IP47030( G )05/92] Your vehicle may be equipped with acourtesy/reading lamp located at the rear-centerof the headliner (roof). The right lamp is for theright side passenger and the left lamp is for theleft side passenger.

[IP47059( G )10/90]


Rear seat courtesy/reading lamps (optional)

*[IP47060( G )05/95] With the lens in the flat position, thecourtesy/reading lamp will illuminate when anydoor is opened or when the headlamp dimmerknob is rotated to the courtesy lamp position.

[IP47080( G )10/90] With the lens in the rotated position and the keyin the ON or ACC position, thecourtesy/reading lamp will illuminate.

%*[IP47270( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps

*[IP47290( ALL)04/95] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps areplastic and should be cleaned with a milddetergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clearwater.


110

%*[IP47300( ALL)03/95] Clock[IP47451( GV)05/94]


The digital clock

[IP47500( ALL)05/95] 1. To set the hour, press and hold theH button. When the desired hour appears,release the button.

[IP47600( ALL)05/95] 2. To set the minutes, press and hold theM button. When the desired minute appears,release the button.

%*[IP49400( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lens

*[IP49500( ALL)04/95] Clean the instrument panel lens with a soft clothand a glass cleaner, such as Ford Ultra-ClearSpray Glass Cleaner, or equivalent. Do not usepaper towel or any abrasive cleaner to clean thelens as these may cause scratches.


111

Steering Column Controls

*[SC00200( ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheelare designed to give you easy access to thecontrols while you are driving.

%*[SC00300( ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever

*[SC00400( ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left sideof the steering column to:

[SC00500( ALL)03/95] ❑operate the turn signals

*[SC00600( ALL)01/95] ❑ turn the high beams on/off

*[SC00700( ALL)01/95] ❑ flash the lights

*[SC00800( ALL)01/95] ❑ turn the windshield wipers and washeron/off

[SC00900( GV)06/94] ❑ turn the cornering lamps on

[SC01900( ALL)02/95]


The turn signal lever

File:rcscg.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 08:04:51 1996

112

%*[SC02100( ALL)01/95] Turn Signals

*[SC02201( ALL)03/95] Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Moveit down to signal a left turn. The correspondingindicator light in the instrument cluster willflash.

*[SC02301( ALL)03/95] If the turn signal stays on after you turn, movethe lever back to the center (off) position.

*[SC02401( ALL)03/95] For lane changes, move the lever far enough tosignal but not to latch. The lever will return tothe off position when you release it.

[SC02600( GV)07/93] If your vehicle is equipped with corneringlamps, they will automatically light on either theright or left side (depending on the direction ofthe turn), when the headlamps are ON.

%*[SC02700( ALL)03/95] High Beams

*[SC02800( ALL)05/95] To turn on the high beams, turn the headlampcontrol knob to the headlamp ON position andpush the turn signal lever away from you untilit latches. When the high beams are ON, thehigh beam indicator light on the instrumentpanel comes on.

*[SC02900( ALL)03/95] To turn off the high beams, pull the levertoward you until it latches. The high beamindicator light turns off.

%*[SC03200( ALL)05/95] Flashing the Lights

*[SC03300( ALL)05/95] To flash the headlamps, pull the lever towardyou for a moment and then release it. Theheadlamps will flash whether the headlampknob is in the on or off position.


113

%*[SC03500( ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer

*[SC03600( ALL)03/95] To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignitionkey must be turned to the ON or ACC position.

[SC03750( ALL)01/95] Rotate the end of the lever away from you toactivate the wipers. The first seven detents areinterval wipe positions, the eighth detent is theLO position and the ninth detent is the HIposition.

*[SC03800( ALL)01/95] To turn the wipers off, turn the knob towardyou to the OFF position.

%*[SC04100( ALL)03/95] Variable Interval Wipers

*[SC04205( ALL)01/95] In addition to two speed wipers, your vehiclehas wipers that you can set to operate atvarying intervals. For example, you can set theinterval so they wipe less often when it drizzlesor more often in heavier rain.

[SC04700( ALL)02/95]


The variable interval wiper on the turn signal lever

*[SC04900( ALL)03/94] To set the interval wipers, turn the knob at theend of the turn signal lever toward or awayfrom you until the wipers are going at thedesired interval.


114

*[SC05300( ALL)04/95] Windshield Washer

*[SC05401( ALL)01/95] To clean the windshield, push in the end of thewiper knob. For a constant spray, keep the knobpushed in. After you release the knob, thewipers operate for two to three cycles beforeturning off (if the wipers were OFF) orreturning to HI, LO, or the interval settingselected.

*[SC05500( ALL)03/95] If the washer does not work, check the washerfluid level and fill it if it is low. See the ServicingYour Grand Marquis chapter. If there is enoughfluid, consult your nearest Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[SC05600( ALL)01/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when thewasher fluid container is empty or activate thewashers at any time for more than 15 secondscontinuously. This could damage the washerpump system.

*[SC05700( ALL)01/93] RWARNING

In freezing weather, the washer solutionmay freeze on the windshield and obscureyour vision. Always warm up thewindshield with the defroster before youuse the washer fluid. If you cannot seethrough the windshield clearly, it canincrease the risk of being involved in acollision.

*[SC05800( ALL)04/95] For information about refilling the washer fluidor replacing your windshield wiper blades, seeWindshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index.


115

%*[SC05810( ALL)03/95] Hazard Flasher[SC05820( ALL)05/95] To alert other drivers to hazardous situations,

push in the hazard flasher on the top of thesteering column. The same switch turns theflashers off.

*[SC05830( ALL)03/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle isrunning or not. The flashers work for up to twohours when the battery is fully charged and ingood condition without draining the batteryexcessively. If the flashers run for longer thantwo hours or if the battery is not fully charged,the battery can be drained.

[SC05860( BCGV)08/93]


The control switch for the hazard flashers


116

%*[SC05900( ALL)01/95] Horn

*[SC06000( ALL)04/95] To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

[SC06900( GV)10/94]

half page art:0010086-F

The horn on the steering wheel


117

%*[SC07300( ALL)01/95] Tilt Steering


Never adjust the steering wheel when thevehicle is moving.

[SC07850( GV)11/92]


The lever to tilt the steering wheel

*[SC08000( ALL)04/95] To change the position of the steering wheel,pull the release lever on the column toward you.Tip the steering wheel to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the steering wheel inplace.


118

%*[SC08600( ALL)03/91] Speed Control (If equipped)

*[SC08800( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has speed control, you canautomatically maintain a constant speed at orabove 30 mph (50 km/h).

*[SC08900( ALL)05/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is notFederal Communications Commission (FCC) orin Canada the Canadian Radio andTelecommunications Commission (CRTC)approved may cause the speed control tomalfunction. Therefore, use only properlyinstalled FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radiotransmitting equipment in your vehicle.

[SC09150( BCGV)12/94] NOTE: When driving in hilly terrain, at highelevations, or when pulling a trailer, itmay be desirable to drive with thetransmission in the Overdrive offmode. This can be done by depressingthe Transmission Control Switch onthe transmission gear selection lever.Driving in this mode prevents thetransmission from shifting excessivelywhen ascending grades, and helpsmaintain speed when going downsteep hills.

*[SC09200( ALL)03/95] NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when usingthe speed control. This will cause theengine to overspeed.

[SC09250( ALL)12/94] When driving uphill, especially with a heavyload, significant speed drops may occur. If thespeed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h) theautomatic speed control will, by design, besuspended. Some vehicles may requiretemporary resumption of manual speed controlwhile ascending steep grades in order tomaintain the selected speed.


119

[SC09900( GV)05/94]


The speed control switches on the steering wheel

*[SC10100( ALL)03/95] To set the speed control:

*[SC10300( ALL)03/95] 1. Press and release the ON switch.

*[SC10400( ALL)04/95] 2. Accelerate to the desired speed above30 mph (50 km/h) using the acceleratorpedal.

*[SC10800( ALL)03/95] 3. Press the SET ACCEL switch and release itimmediately to set your speed. If you keepthis switch pressed, your speed will continueto increase.

*[SC10900( ALL)03/95] 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle will maintain the speed you set.

*[SC11000( ALL)01/95] If you drive up or down a steep hill, yourvehicle may momentarily slow down or speedup, even though the speed control is on. This isnormal.


120

*[SC11030( ALL)03/95] NOTE: If your speed increases above your setspeed while driving in D (Drive) on adownhill grade, you may want todepress the Transmission ControlSwitch located on the shift lever toturn off overdrive to reduce vehiclespeed. Speed control cannot reduce thevehicle speed if it goes above your setspeed on a downhill grade.


Do not use the speed control in heavytraffic or on roads that are winding,slippery, or unpaved.

%*[SC11200( ALL)03/95] Accelerating With the Speed ControlOperating

*[SC11300( ALL)03/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed upmomentarily. When you take your foot off theaccelerator, the vehicle will return to the setspeed.

%*[SC11400( ALL)01/95] Resetting the Speed Control

*[SC11450( ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a lower speed, useone of the following procedures:

[SC11500( ALL)05/94] ❑COAST — Press and hold the COAST switch.Release the switch when the vehicle slowsdown to the desired speed.

[SC11550( ALL)05/94] ❑Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicleattains the desired speed, press the SETACCEL switch and release it immediately.


121

% [SC11600(M GV)05/95] ❑TAP-DOWN — Press and then quicklyrelease the COAST switch. Each time you“tap” the switch, the set speed will decreaseby one (1) mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple tapswill cause the set speed to decrease inincrements of one (1) mph (1.6 km/h). Forexample, if the current set speed is 60 mph(96 km/h) five (5) taps of the COAST switchwill decrease the vehicle speed and SET it at55 mph (88 km/h).

*[SC11650( ALL)04/95] If vehicle speed is reduced below 30 mph(50 km/h) by any of the above methods, thenyou must manually accelerate to a speed over30 mph (50 km/h) and reset the system.

*[SC11700( ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a higher speed,follow one of these procedures:

[SC11750( ALL)05/94] ❑ACCEL — Press and hold the SET ACCELswitch. Release the switch when the vehiclehas accelerated to the desired speed.

[SC11800( ALL)05/94] ❑Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, press theSET ACCEL switch and release itimmediately.

% [SC11850(M GV)05/95] ❑TAP-UP — Press and then quickly release theSET ACCEL switch. Each time you “tap” theswitch, the set speed will increase by one (1)mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will cause theset speed to increase in increments of one (1)mph (1.6 km/h). For example, if the currentset speed is 55 mph (88 km/h) five (5) tapsof the SET ACCEL switch will increase thevehicle speed and SET it at 60 mph(96 km/h).


122

%*[SC12800( ALL)03/95] Cancelling and Resuming a Set Speed

[SC13000( BCGV)03/95] If you press the brake pedal, speed control issuspended. You can return to the set speed bypressing the RESUME switch, as long as you didnot press the OFF switch. You must be drivingat least 30 mph (48 km/h).

*[SC13400( ALL)03/95] Your vehicle will gradually return to thepreviously set speed and then maintain it.

%*[SC13501( ALL)01/95] To Turn Speed Control Off

*[SC13601( ALL)04/95] Press the OFF switch.

*[SC13701( ALL)01/95] Speed control is also turned OFF each time thevehicle ignition is shut off.


123

Features

*[FV00300( ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designedfor your comfort, convenience and safety. Readthis chapter to find out about standard andoptional features.

%*[FV00400( ALL)01/95] Doors%*[FV01105( GV)02/95] Childproof Locks for the Rear Doors

*[FV01110( GV)01/95] In addition to power locks, your vehicle haschildproof locks for the rear doors. If you setthese locks, the rear doors cannot be openedfrom the inside of the vehicle. The doors can stillbe opened from the outside when the lock knobsare raised.

[FV01130( GV)11/90]


The childproof locks for the rear doors

File:rcfvg.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 07:53:46 1996

124

*[FV01140( GV)03/95] To set the childproof lock on each rear door,open the rear door.

[FV01160( GV)03/95] Find the lever inside the label with the wordLOCKED. Move the lever up.

*[FV01180( GV)03/95] To release the childproof lock, open the reardoor from the outside.

*[FV01195( GV)03/95] Move the lever down.

%*[FV01400( ALL)04/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped)

[FV01600( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has power door locks, thecontrols to lock the doors are on the trim panelof the front door. When you close the doorsafter you set the door locks, the doors remainlocked. If the power mechanism fails, the manualdoor locks will override the power controls.Pulling on a front inside door handle willautomatically override and release the front doorlock.

[FV02100( GV)05/94]


The power locks on the driver’s door


125

%*[FV02600( BCGV)01/95] Using the Illuminated Entry System(If equipped)

[FV02700( CGV)05/95] The interior lights will illuminate forapproximately 25 seconds when either front doorhandle is lifted, any button on the keyless entrypad is pressed, or the remote entry systemUNLOCK button is pushed. If the amount oflight outside your vehicle is below apredetermined level, the exterior lights will alsoilluminate.

[FV03200( BCGV)02/95] These lights automatically turn off after 25seconds or when you turn the ignition key toON or ACC. The inside lights will not turn off ifyou have turned them on manually or if a dooris open.

%*[FV03598( BCGV)05/95] Using the Keyless Entry System(If equipped)

[FV03600( BCGV)06/92] If your vehicle has the keyless entry system, youcan lock or unlock the vehicle doors and trunkwithout using a key. The buttons for the systemare above the outside door handle on thedriver’s side.

[FV03850( GV)05/94]


The keyless entry buttons


126

*[FV03900( BCGV)04/95] When you bought your vehicle, you were givena computer code that operates the system foryour vehicle. For your convenience, we haveduplicated this code in three places.

*[FV04000( BCGV)02/95] The code is:

*[FV04100( BCGV)02/95] ❑on your owner’s wallet card found in theglove compartment

[FV04400( BCGV)02/95] ❑ taped to the underside of the trunk lid

[FV04800( GV)10/94] ❑ taped to the computer module behind thedriver’s door trim panel.

[FV04925( BCGV)05/95] When you use this entry system, the illuminatedentry system turns on the interior lights for 25seconds and the buttons on the keypad light up.Do not push the buttons with a key, ballpointpen, pencil, or any other hard object. Theseobjects could damage the buttons.

%*[FV04950( BCGV)02/95] Unlocking the doors with the keyless entrysystem

[FV05000( BCGV)02/95] You must unlock the driver’s door before youunlock any of the other doors or trunk. If youlet more than five seconds pass between pressingnumbers, the system shuts down, and you haveto enter the code again. The system has shutdown if the keypad light is out. If the keylessentry system does not work properly, use thekey or transmitter(s) to lock and unlock thedoors or unlock the trunk.

*[FV05100( BCGV)02/95] 1. To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factorycode or your personal code. All codes havefive numbers. After you press the fifthnumber, the driver’s door unlocks.

[FV05140( GV)03/92] 2. To unlock the passenger’s doors, press the3/4 button within five seconds of unlockingthe driver’s door or trunk, or re-enter thecode to open the driver’s door, then press3/4.


127

*[FV05320( GV)01/95] 3. To unlock the trunk, press the 5/6 buttonwithin five seconds of unlocking the driver’sor passenger’s doors, or re-enter the code toopen the driver’s door, then press 5/6.

[FV05350( GV)06/93] As long as the driver’s door has been unlockedfirst, you can open the passenger’s doors or thetrunk in any order.

*[FV05400( BCGV)02/95] Locking the doors with the keyless entrysystem

*[FV05500( BCGV)02/95] Along with unlocking your doors, you can usethe keyless entry system to lock the doors. Youcan also use the Autolock feature toautomatically lock the doors after you get in thevehicle.

[FV05600( BCGV)05/94] To lock all of the vehicle’s doors at the sametime, press 7/8 and 9/0 at the same time. It isnot necessary to first enter the keypad code.

% [FV05611( BCGV)02/95] Autolock (With Keyless Entry if Equipped)

*[FV05621( BCGV)02/95] The Autolock feature will automatically lock allthe doors when:

[FV05631( BCGV)02/95] ❑ the vehicle doors are fully closed

*[FV05641( BCGV)02/95] ❑ the ignition key is turned to the ON position

[FV05650( BCGV)02/95] ❑ someone is sitting in the driver’s seat or aheavy object is placed on the seat, and

[FV05680( GV)10/94] ❑ the vehicle is in any forward or reverse gear.

*[FV05701( BCGV)02/95] The Autolock feature will repeat when:

*[FV05750( BCGV)02/95] ❑ the ignition key remains in the ON position

[FV05825( GV)10/94] ❑ someone remains sitting in the driver’s seator a heavy object is on the seat,

*[FV05865( GV)08/94] ❑a door is opened and then closed, and

[FV05880( GV)10/94] ❑ the vehicle is in any forward or reverse gear.


128

*[FV05901( BCGV)02/95] If you do not want to use the Autolock feature,it can be deactivated by using the buttons forthe keyless entry system.

[FV05950( BCGV)02/95] To deactivate the Autolock feature:

[FV06001( BCGV)02/95] 1. Enter your permanent five-digit entry code(not the user code you may have set).

*[FV06051( BCGV)02/95] 2. Within 5 seconds, press and hold 7/8.

*[FV06101( BCGV)02/95] 3. Within 5 more seconds, press and release3/4.

*[FV06200( BCGV)02/95] 4. Release 7/8.

*[FV06300( BCGV)02/95] To reactivate the Autolock feature, simply repeatthe instructions for deactivating the system. TheAutolock feature can be turned on and off usingthe instructions above.

%*[FV06800( BCGV)02/95] Programming your own entry code

*[FV06900( BCGV)01/95] You can program a personal code to unlockyour vehicle. This code does not replace thepermanent code that the dealership gave you.Use your personal code in the same manner asyou would your original code.

*[FV07000( BCGV)02/95] To program your own code:

*[FV07050( BCGV)02/95] 1. Select five digits for your personal code.

[FV07100( BCGV)02/95] 2. Enter the permanent code that the dealershipgave you.

*[FV07200( BCGV)02/95] 3. Within five seconds, press 1/2.

*[FV07300( BCGV)02/95] 4. Within five seconds of pressing 1/2, enteryour personal code, pressing each digitwithin five seconds of the previous digit.


129

[FV07350( GV)10/94] 5. Five seconds after you press the fifth digit,your door lock system will lock and unlockthe vehicle doors to confirm successfulprogramming.

*[FV07400( BCGV)02/95] The keyless entry system registers thissecond code. To open your vehicle, you cannow use either code. The module remembersonly one personal code at a time. Entering asecond personal code will erase the first,replacing it with the new second one.

*[FV07500( BCGV)02/95] To erase your personal code:

*[FV07600( BCGV)02/95] 1. Enter the original permanent code.

[FV07750( GV)10/94] 2. Press and release 1/2 within five seconds ofStep 1.

[FV07850( GV)10/94] 3. Press the 1/2 button a second time and holdfor two seconds.

*[FV07900( BCGV)02/95] The keyless entry system automaticallyerases your personal code. The system willnow only respond to the permanent code.

*[FV07950( BCGV)02/95] Do not set a code that presents the numbers insequential order, such as 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/0.Studies show that people who idly press thebuttons usually press a sequential pattern. Also,do not select a code that uses the same buttonfive times. Thieves can easily figure out thesetypes of codes.

[FV07955( GV)10/94] Your door lock system will lock and unlock thevehicle doors to confirm successful erasure. Thesystem will now only respond to the permanentcode.


130

% [FV08007( GV)10/94] Battery Saver

*[FV08012( GV)01/95] When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle willturn off battery voltage to the vehicle lamps asfollows:

*[FV08016( GV)01/95] ❑Courtesy lights (lights which come on when adoor is opened): after 10 minutes.

[FV08020( GV)10/94] ❑Map/Glove compartment/Trunk/Hoodlamps: after 30 minutes.

[FV08023( GV)10/94] ❑Headlamps/Park lamps (only if headlampswitch is left in Headlamp position): after 10minutes.

*[FV08027( BCGV)02/95] This will prevent draining of the battery if thoselights have been left on inadvertently or if adoor is not completely closed. Battery voltage tothese lamps will be restored when the outsidefront door handles are lifted, the keyless entrykeypad is used, the remote entry transmitter isused, any door is opened, the trunk is opened,or the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

%*[FV08030( ALL)02/95] Remote Entry System(If equipped)

*[FV08036( ALL)03/94] If your vehicle has the remote entry system, youcan lock and unlock the vehicle doors and openthe trunk without using a key. The remote alsohas a personal alarm feature. The buttons for thesystem are located on the hand heldtransmitter(s) that came with your vehicle.

*[FV08040( ALL)02/95] The system will work with up to fourtransmitters. Your vehicle came with twotransmitters. Additional transmitters can beordered from your dealer.

[FV08047( GV)10/94] The remote entry features only operate with thetransmission in P (Park) or N (Neutral).


131

[FV08053( GV)03/94]


Remote entry transmitter

%*[FV08055( ALL)02/95] Unlocking the doors and opening the trunk

*[FV08060( ALL)02/95] To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCKbutton.

*[FV08065( ALL)02/95] To unlock the other doors, press the UNLOCKbutton a second time within five seconds ofunlocking the driver’s door.

[FV08075( GV)05/95] To open the trunk, press the TRUNK buttontwice within five seconds.

*[FV08080( ALL)02/95] Locking the doors

*[FV08085( ALL)02/95] To lock all the doors, press the LOCK button.

[FV08093( GV)10/94] The doors will lock and the horn will chirp toindicate the vehicle is locked.

*[FV08096( GV)01/95] The door lock Horn Chirp is a programmablefeature. To deactivate the Horn Chirp feature:

*[FV08099( GV)01/95] 1. Enter your permanent five-digit code (notthe user code you may have set).

[FV08102( GV)10/94] 2. Within five seconds, press and hold 7/8.

[FV08106( GV)10/94] 3. Within five more seconds, press and release1/2.

*[FV08108( GV)02/95] 4. Release 7/8.


132

[FV08111( GV)10/94] To reactivate the Horn Chirp feature, simplyrepeat the instructions for deactivating thefeature.

*[FV08114( ALL)02/95] Activating the remote personal alarm

*[FV08120( ALL)02/95] If you wish to activate the remote personalalarm, press the PANIC button. This will honkthe horn and flash the low beam headlamps andtail lamps for approximately two minutes andforty-five seconds. You can turn it OFF bypressing the PANIC button again or by turningthe ignition key to the RUN position.

[FV08125( ALL)05/94] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK,TRUNK or PANIC buttons, the illuminated entrysystem turns on the interior lights for 25seconds. You can turn these lights off with theLOCK button or by turning the ignition to theRUN position. The interior lights will not turnoff if you have turned them on manually or if adoor is open.

%*[FV08725( ALL)02/95] Replacing the batteries

*[FV08760( GV)01/95] The remote entry transmitter is powered by twocoin type three-volt lithium 1616batteries (included) that should last for severalyears of normal use. If you notice a significantdecrease in operating range, the batteries shouldbe replaced. Replacement batteries can bepurchased at most pharmacies, watch stores orat your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[FV08775( ALL)02/95] NOTE: The operating range of the remoteentry system can also be affected byweather conditions (such as very coldtemperatures) or structures around thevehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radioand TV towers, etc.). Typical operatingrange will allow you to be up to 33feet (10 meters) away from yourvehicle.


133

%*[FV08850( ALL)02/95] Replacement/additional transmitters

*[FV08880( GV)01/95] In the event a transmitter is lost, a new one maybe purchased from your dealer.

*[FV08885( GV)09/94] To program replacement or additionaltransmitters you must have all the transmittersintended for use on your vehicle.

*[FV08890( GV)09/94] Initiating the following procedure erases all priorprogrammed transmitters, thus ALL must bereprogrammed at the same time.

*[FV08895( GV)01/95] 1. Enter the factory keyless entry code. Yourpersonal code will not allow programming.

*[FV08901( GV)01/95] 2. Press the 1/2 button.

*[FV08905( GV)01/95] 3. Press one button on each of the transmittersto be programmed. Each transmitter buttonmust be pressed within seven (7) seconds ofthe prior one. Each time a transmitter issuccessfully programmed, all of the vehicledoors will lock and then unlock to verifyprogramming. If the doors did notlock/unlock, your transmitter was notprogrammed.

*[FV08910( GV)01/95] Additional transmitters may be purchased fromyour dealer (remote entry system will work withup to four transmitters). Follow the sameprogramming procedure as above.

*[FV08925( ALL)02/95] THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OFTHE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECTTO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSEHARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THISDEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANYINTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDINGINTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSEUNDESIRED OPERATION.


134

*[FV08930( GV)01/95] NOTE: All transmitters to be used on yourvehicle must beprogrammed/reprogrammed at the sametime.

%*[FV08950( ALL)02/95] Windows%*[FV08980( BCGV)02/95] Using the Power Windows

*[FV09000( GV)02/95] Each door has a power control that opens andcloses the window on that door. The driver’sdoor has a master control panel that operates allfour windows.

*[FV09050( ALL)01/95] Power windows can only be opened or closedwhen the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCposition.

*[FV09075(MBCGV )05/95] RWARNING

Do not let children play with the powerwindows. They may seriously hurtthemselves. Make sure occupants are clearof the window(s) before closing.

[FV09300( GV)05/94]


The master controls on the driver’s door

*[FV09400(M GV)05/95] To lock out all window switches except themaster controls, press the window lock switchonce. To restore control to the individualwindows, press the switch again.


135

%*[FV09500(M GV)05/95] There is also an Express Down feature on thedriver’s power window.

[FV09600(M GV)05/95] To operate, actuate driver’s power windowswitch to the down position for less than 0.4seconds; the window will then openautomatically. To terminate automatic operationbefore the window completely opens, operate theswitch again, for less than 0.4 seconds, to eitherthe up or down position. Actuating the switchfor greater than 0.4 seconds providesconventional power window operation. Closingof the power window is conventional operationonly.

%*[FV15700( ALL)01/95] Seats%*[FV15710( ALL)04/95] Head Restraints

*[FV15720( ALL)04/95] If you use them properly, head restraints willhelp protect your head and neck in a collision.

*[FV15730( ALL)05/95] A head restraint helps protect you best if youposition it behind your head and not behindyour neck.

*[FV15740( ALL)02/95] Standard head restraints

*[FV15750( ALL)01/95] You can adjust the head restraints for yourcomfort and protection.

[FV15770( ALL)05/92]


Adjusting the head restraint


136

% [FV15850( GV)03/94] Adjusting the Front Passenger SeatManually

*[FV16000( ALL)02/89] In the front seats, you can move the whole seatforward or backward or tilt the back of the seatforward or backward.

*[FV16150( GV)01/95] To move the seat forward or backward:

[FV16200( BCGV)04/95] 1. Find the adjustment bar underneath the frontpart of the seat.

[FV16400( BCGV)04/95] 2. Lift the bar to unlatch the seat.

*[FV16600( ALL)04/95] 3. Move the seat to the desired position.

[FV16700( BCGV)04/95] 4. Release the bar to latch the seat in its newposition. Make sure the seat locks securely inplace.

[FV17050( GV)05/92]


The front seat adjustment bar


137

[FV17150( GV)05/92] To recline the front seat:

*[FV17200( ALL)01/95] 1. On the side of the seat, find the handle forthe recliner.

*[FV17300( ALL)04/95] 2. Lift the handle up and hold it in place.

*[FV17400( ALL)01/95] 3. Lean against the back of the seat and adjustit to the position you want. You can tilt theseat back or bring it forward.

*[FV17500( ALL)04/95] 4. Release the handle to lock the seat in its newposition.

*[FV17600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatbackwhen the vehicle is moving.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, always drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap belt snugand low across the hips.

[FV17800( GV)03/94]


The seatback recliner handle


138

%*[FV18500( BCGV)05/95] Using the Power Seats (If equipped)

[FV18700( GV)10/94] If your vehicle has power seats, you can adjustthem in several directions. The controls arelocated on the driver and passenger door trimpanels or on the side of the driver’s seat.

[FV18810( GV)10/94]


The power seat controls on the driver’s seat — Base models


Do not pile cargo higher than theseatbacks to avoid injuring people in acollision or sudden stop.

% [FV18920( GV)10/90] Power Seat Recliner/Lumbar Option

[FV18960( GV)10/90] The arrows on the power seat control panelindicate the direction the seat or seatback willmove. To adjust the seat or seatback move thecontrol knob in the desired direction.

[FV18980( GV)03/94] The power lumbar switch controls the inflationof the lumbar support pad in the seatback. Toinflate the lumbar pad, push the forward portionof the switch. To deflate the pad, press the rearportion of the switch.


139

[FV18990( GV)05/95]


The power lumbar switch

%*[FV20500( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats

*[FV20600( ALL)05/95] Leather and vinyl

*[FV20650( ALL)05/95] For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with asoft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning,wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaneror a mild soap.

%*[FV20700( ALL)04/95] Fabric

*[FV20750( ALL)04/95] Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broomor a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spotsimmediately. Follow the directions that comewith the cleaner.

*[FV20775( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on asmall, hidden area of fabric. If thefabric’s color or texture is adverselyaffected by a particular cleaner, do notuse it.


140

%*[FV20800( ALL)01/95] Mirrors

*[FV20850( ALL)03/95] You can adjust your rearview mirror in anydirection. The special swivel bracket lets youmove the mirror up or down and from side toside.

[FV21000( ALL)03/95] RWARNING

Make sure you can see clearly through therearview mirror at all times. Do not blockyour vision. If you cannot see through themirror, it could result in a collision,injuring yourself and others.

%*[FV21500( GV)01/95] Automatic Dimming Inside RearviewMirror (If equipped)

[FV22620( GV)10/94]


The automatic non-glare mirror

*[FV22630( GV)01/95] The electronic day/night mirror will changefrom the normal state to the non-glare statewhen bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. Thismirror functions at night, and has a limitedfunction at dusk or dawn. From the non-glarestate, the mirror will return to the normal stateafter a short delay. The delay starts when theglare goes away. The delay prevents excessivechanging of the mirror as traffic moves behindand around the vehicle, or on rolling hills andcurves.


141

[FV22650( GV)10/94] To turn the mirror on, push the ON/OFFswitch, located on the bottom of the mirror, tolatch it in the ON position. The switch willilluminate and the mirror will be in theautomatic dimming mode. To turn the switchillumination and automatic dimming feature off,push the ON/OFF switch again.

*[FV22660( GV)01/95] The electronic mirror measures the brightness ofthe light coming in from the rear of the vehicle.It automatically makes a correction in the glarestate. The mirror may be turned off in either thenormal or non-glare position.

[FV22685( GV)03/95] There are two light sensors (photocells) in thismirror. The sensor that detects rear glare islocated inside a window in the center of themirror. The second light sensor whichdetermines outside light level is located on thebackside of the mirror case.

*[FV22690( GV)01/95] One important safety feature is that the mirrorautomatically returns to the normal positionwhenever the vehicle is placed in R (Reverse)(when the mirror is in the ON position). Thisfeature ensures a bright clear view in the mirrorwhen backing up.

% [FV24100( BCGV)07/93] Adjusting the Dual Electric RemoteControl Mirrors

[FV24150( GV)11/90] Your vehicle is equipped with electric remotecontrol side view mirrors; the switch forcontrolling their operation is a control knob inthe armrest.

%*[FV24400( ALL)01/95] Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirrorwith harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum-based cleaning products.


142

[FV24450( GV)03/94]


The mirror controls on the driver’s left armrest

*[FV24700( ALL)04/95] To adjust the side mirrors:

*[FV24800( ALL)01/95] 1. Find the control switch in the driver’s doorpanel.

*[FV24900( ALL)02/95] 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving theselector switch to R or L.

[FV25000( ALL)06/93] 3. Move the knob in the direction of the arrowsfor the direction you want to move themirror.

*[FV25100( ALL)01/95] 4. Return the selector switch to the middleposition to keep the mirror in place.

%*[FV25200( GV)03/95] Heated Mirror Feature

*[FV25300( GV)03/95] Both mirrors are heated whenever the ElectricRear Window Defroster is turned on. Do notremove ice from the mirrors with a scraper oryou could damage them. If the outside mirrorglass is frozen in place, do not attempt toreadjust or move the mirror glass or damagemay result.

[FV28700( ALL)01/89] The Right Side Convex Mirror

[FV28800( ALL)03/90] The side view mirror on the right is a convexmirror. This mirror gives you a wider view ofthe lanes on your right and behind you.


143


The side view mirror on the right makesobjects appear smaller and farther awaythan they actually are.

%*[FV28950( ALL)01/95] Sun Visors

*[FV28955( G )03/95] Using the Sun Visors

[FV28960( G )03/95] Your vehicle has special sun visors. Besides theregular sun visor, you may have a second sunvisor. By using both the regular sun visor andthe second visor, you shield the sun from boththe front and the side of the vehicle at the sametime.

*[FV28970( G )03/95] To block the sun, move the main visor sidewaysand flip the second visor down.

[FV28975( G )03/95]


The sun visors


144

%*[FV29100( ALL)05/94] Turning on the Mirror Light on the SunVisors (If equipped)

[FV29300( ALL)06/93] To turn on the visor mirror light, lift the mirrorcover.

[FV29900( GV)10/90]


The mirror on the sun visor

%*[FV32626( GV)03/95] Ashtray and Cupholder[FV32650( GV)10/94] Your vehicle is equipped with an

ashtray/cupholder mounted to the lower centerof the instrument panel.

*[FV32675( GV)01/95] To open the ashtray, pull out the bottom edge ofthe drawer until it stops.

*[FV32701( GV)01/95] To close, remove cup(s) and push drawerforward until closed.


145

%*[FV32725(M GV)03/95] Power Point Electrical Outlet[FV32760( GV)03/95] The power point outlet is located on the

instrument panel to the right of the ashtray. Thisoutlet should be used for optional electricalaccessories.

[FV32785( GV)05/95] NOTE: Do not attempt to plug the cigarettelighter into the power point outlet.Damage could occur. Do not plugoptional electrical accessories into thecigarette lighter. Electrical systemdamage could occur.

[FV32815( GV)05/95]


Power point electrical outlet


146

%*[FV32875( ALL)01/95] Storage Compartments

*[FV32900(M GV)01/95] Your vehicle may have several small storagecompartments:

[FV33000( BCGV)11/94] ❑a glove compartment that locks. Use theround key to lock and unlock it.

*[FV33100( BCGV)01/95] ❑ two map pockets on the panels of the frontdoors.

*[FV33210( G )01/95] ❑ two map pockets on the back of the frontseats.


Do not put objects on the ledge betweenthe back seat and the rear window, asthey can become dangerous projectiles andinjure someone.

%*[FV33400( ALL)01/95] Trunk

*[FV33500( ALL)01/95] Opening the Trunk Manually

[FV34200( GV)05/94] The trunk in your vehicle gives you plenty ofroom for storage — 20.6 cubic feet (.58 cubicmeters).

%*[FV34600( ALL)03/95] To open and close the trunk from the outside:

[FV34950( BCGV)03/95] 1. Insert the key into the lock on the trunk.

[FV35100( ALL)11/90] 2. Turn the key to the right until the trunkopens.

[FV35300( ALL)11/90] 3. Remove the key before you close and lockthe lid.

[FV35450( ALL)06/93] 4. Shut the trunk lid completely.


147

% [FV36200( ALL)03/95] Using the Remote Control for theTrunk (If equipped)

[FV36550( GV)12/91] You can use the remote control on the driver’sdoor to unlock and open the trunk unless youlock the button with the main key. The valet keyequipped with your vehicle can only open thedoors and start the engine.

[FV36800( GV)05/95]


The remote control for the trunk


148

% [FV47500( ALL)08/93] Positive Location Floor Mat[FV47700( GV)06/93] When installing or removing the driver’s side

floor mat you must attach/detach the positivelocation grommet from the hook on the floor.The hook is just forward of the center of thedriver’s seat. This is done by rotating thegrommet one quarter turn, slipping the eyeletonto the hook, and sliding it to the floor.

[FV47900( GV)03/94]


The positive location floor mat hook


149

Electronic Sound Systems

% [AS10315( GV)05/94]

full page art:0060663-A

Luxury Audio System (Analog)

File:rcasg.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 08:04:26 1996

150

*[AS10319( GV)03/95] Luxury Audio System

*[AS10320( GV)02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS10330( GV)04/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS10340( GV)01/95] Press the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to turn theradio on. Press again to turn it off.

*[AS10351( GV)04/95] How to adjust the volume

*[AS10352( GV)05/95] Turn the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to the right toincrease the volume and to the left to decreasethe volume.

*[AS10354( GV)04/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS10355( GV)04/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desiredfrequency band. Pushing the “AM/FM” buttoncauses the frequency band to switch from “AM”to “FM1” to “FM2” to “AM”, changing one bandto the next each time the button is pressed.These functions are used with the stationmemory buttons described under How to tuneradio stations.

%*[AS10356( GV)05/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS10357( GV)01/95] There are four ways for you to tune in aparticular station. You can use the “TUNE”,“SEEK”, “SCAN” or memory buttons.

*[AS10358( GV)05/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function

[AS10359( GV)03/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time by pressing andreleasing either the left b or right a side ofthe “TUNE” button. To change frequenciesquickly, press and hold down either the rightor left side of the “TUNE” button.

*[AS10360( GV)04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to anyallowable broadcast frequency, whether ornot a station is present on that frequency.(See All About Radio Frequencies in thissection.)


151

*[AS10361( GV)04/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS10362( GV)03/95] Press the right a side of the “SEEK” buttonto select the next listenable station up thefrequency band. Press the left b side of thebutton to select the next listenable stationdown the frequency band. By holding thebutton down, listenable stations can bepassed over to reach the desired station.

*[AS10363( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS10364( GV)04/95] Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin thescan mode up the frequency band, stoppingon each listenable station for approximatelyfive seconds.

*[AS10365( GV)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled station, press the “SCAN” buttonagain.

*[AS10366( GV)01/95] ❑Setting the station MEMORY PRESET buttons

*[AS10367( GV)01/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2)

[AS10368( GV)05/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttonsto the desired frequencies:

*[AS10369( GV)04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS10370( GV)04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and holdthe button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.

*[AS10371( GV)04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each stationmemory preset button you want to set.


152

*[AS10372( GV)01/95] Using the Automatic Memory Store feature(“AUTOSET”)

*[AS10373( GV)01/95] If the memory buttons have been set, either byusing the Auto Memory Load feature or if youhave set them manually, the system is preparedto let you use a convenient feature calledAutomatic Memory Store.

*[AS10374( GV)01/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can continuallyset strong stations into your memory buttonswithout losing your originally set stations. Yourradio will automatically set your memorybuttons to the strong local stations.

*[AS10375( GV)01/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the“AUTOSET” button once. Your radio will set thefirst six strong stations of the band you are in(AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memory buttons.The display will flash “AUTO” and display theautoset icon “A” while the stations are being setin the memory buttons.

*[AS10376( GV)01/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than six strongstations in the frequency band, theremaining unfilled buttons will storethe last strong station detected on theband. After all stations have beenfilled, the radio will begin playing thestation stored on memory button 1.

*[AS10377( GV)01/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode andreturn to the manually-set memory buttonstations, simply push the “AUTOSET” button.Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”. Thenext time Auto Memory Store is activated onthat band, the radio will store the next set of sixstrong stations.


153

*[AS10378( GV)01/95] Adjusting the tone balance of your radio

*[AS10379( GV)01/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass and trebleresponse

*[AS10380( GV)01/95] Push the “BASS/TREB” popout knob to gainaccess to the bass and treble controls. Basscontrol allows you to adjust the lower, bassfrequencies to your preference. The outer ringof the “BASS/TREB” knob adjusts the bass(turn clockwise to increase bass;counterclockwise to decrease bass).

*[AS10381( GV)01/95] Treble control allows you to adjust thehigher, treble frequencies of your radio toyour preference. The inner ring of the“BASS/TREB” knob adjusts the treble (turnclockwise to increase treble; counterclockwiseto decrease treble).

*[AS10382( GV)01/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance and speaker fader

*[AS10383( GV)01/95] Push the “BAL/FADE” popout knob to gainaccess to the speaker balance and fadercontrols. Balance control allows you to adjustthe sound distribution between the right andleft speakers. The outer ring of “BAL/FADE”knob adjusts the speaker balance control.(Turn clockwise to shift the sound to theright speakers, and turn counterclockwise toshift the sound to the left speakers.)

*[AS10384( GV)01/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. The inner ring of the “BAL/FADE”knob adjusts the speaker fader. (Turnclockwise to shift the sound to the rearspeakers, and turn counterclockwise to shiftthe sound to the front speakers.)


154

%*[AS10394( GV)01/95] Your Antenna

*[AS10395( GV)03/95] Antennas for both AM and FM reception arehidden in the back glass of your vehicle. Thereis an internal antenna module that will switchbetween AM and FM, when bands are changed,for maximum reception performance.

*[AS10396( GV)01/95] NOTE: Do not attempt to adapt any other typeof antenna system to your audiosystem.

*[AS10397( GV)02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette TapePlayer

*[AS10398( GV)02/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use thecassette tape player.

*[AS10399( GV)02/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS10400( GV)04/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped withpower loading. Once you insert a tape and pushslightly (with the open edge to the right), theloading mechanism draws the tape the rest ofthe way in and play will begin after amomentary tape tightening process. Displayindicates “TAPE” while tape is playing.

*[AS10401( GV)01/95] If the player is in the tape mode but not in play,pressing the “TAPE” button will activate play. Ifthe “TAPE” button is pressed with no tapeinserted, the display will flash “NO TAPE”.


155

*[AS10402( GV)02/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS10403( GV)01/95] There are six ways to quickly locate a desiredselection on the tape. You can use the fastforward, rewind, Blank Skip, “SEEK”, “SCAN”or “SIDE 1-2” functions. Following are briefdescriptions of each:

*[AS10404( GV)02/95] ❑Fast forwarding the tape

*[AS10405( GV)03/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”button. The radio will play while the tape isin fast forward. The light above the “FF”button will blink while in the fast forwardmode. Press “FF” again or press the “TAPE”button to stop fast forwarding. At the end ofthe tape, the direction automatically reversesand plays the other side of the tape.

*[AS10406( GV)02/95] ❑Rewinding the tape

*[AS10407( GV)03/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.The radio will automatically begin playingwhile the tape is rewinding. The light abovethe “REW” button will blink while in therewind mode. Press “REW” again or pressthe “TAPE” button to stop rewinding.

*[AS10408( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function with your cassettetape player

*[AS10409( GV)03/95] While in the tape mode, push the right aside of the “SEEK” button to seek forward tothe next selection on the tape. Push the leftb side to restart a currently playing tapeselection.

*[AS10410( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “Blank Skip” function with yourcassette tape player

*[AS10415( GV)01/95] Press the “Blank Skip” button to activate theblank skip mode. After approximately 20seconds of blank program, the tape will seekforward to the next program.


156

*[AS10420( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function with yourcassette tape player

*[AS10425( GV)01/95] Pushing the “SCAN” button will begin theforward scan mode on the tape currentlyplaying, stopping on each tape selection forapproximately eight seconds.

*[AS10430( GV)01/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled tape selection, press the “SCAN”button or the “TAPE” button.

*[AS10435( GV)02/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape beingplayed

*[AS10440( GV)01/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selectedby pressing the “SIDE 1-2” button.

*[AS10445( GV)02/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS10450( GV)03/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the“EJECT” button. The tape will eject only whenin the tape mode. The cassette cannot be ejectedwhen the radio is playing an “AM” or “FM”station. The system will revert to radio modewhen the cassette is ejected.

*[AS10455( GV)02/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS10460( GV)01/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufacturedunder license from Dolby LabsLicensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

*[AS10465( GV)03/95] Push the k button to activate. Whenactivated, the light above the k button will beilluminated.


157

*[AS10470( GV)01/95] Tape error messages

*[AS10475( GV)01/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped todiagnose certain problems you may experience.Error codes are as follows:

*[AS10480( GV)01/95] TD E1 — Radio tries to change sides of tape 3times in a 10 second span. Push “EJECT” andtry another tape. If problem persists, referproblem to qualified personnel for service.

*[AS10485( GV)01/95] TD E2 — Tape eject failure. Radio tries to ejecttape and it will not eject. Push “EJECT” to ejecttape. If the tape will not eject, refer problem toqualified personnel for service.

*[AS10490( GV)01/95] TD E3 — Loading error. Push “EJECT” to ejecttape. Reload tape. If the same error code appearsin the display, try another tape.

*[AS10491( GV)02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player andTapes

*[AS10492( GV)02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape playerperforming the way it was meant to, read andfollow these simple precautions:

*[AS10493( GV)02/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge toclean the tape player head after 10-12 hoursof play will help maintain the best playbacksound and proper tape operation.

*[AS10494( GV)02/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long orless should be used. Tapes longer than 90minutes are thinner and subject to breakageor may jam the tape player mechanism.


158

*[AS10495( GV)02/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to directsunlight, high humidity and extreme heat orcold. If they are exposed to extremeconditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS10496( GV)02/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten itbefore playing by putting your finger or apencil into one of the holes and turning thehub until the tape is tight.

*[AS10497( GV)02/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can becomelodged in the mechanism. Remove any looselabel material before inserting a cassette.

*[AS10498( GV)03/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tapeplayer when not in use. High heat in thevehicle can cause the cassette to warp.


159

% [AS56200( GV)05/94]


Midline Stereo Cassette


160

[AS56240( G )05/95] Midline Stereo Cassette Radio

*[AS56250( GV)02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS56300( GV)04/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS56350( GV)01/95] Press the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to turn theradio on. Press again to turn it off.

*[AS56400( GV)04/95] How to adjust the volume

*[AS56450( GV)04/94] Turn the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to the right toincrease the volume and to the left to decreasethe volume. Bars illuminate in the display toshow relative volume level.

*[AS56460( GV)04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above acertain listening level when theignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, thevolume will come back to a “nominal”listening level. However, if the radiopower is turned off (with the“POWER” button), the volume willremain in the position it was set atwhen radio power is switched back on.

*[AS56500( GV)04/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS56550( GV)02/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desiredfrequency band or to stop/store cassette tape(when in cassette mode). Pushing the buttonmore than once will alternate between AM, FM1and FM2. These functions are used with thestation memory buttons described under How totune radio stations.


161

%*[AS56600( GV)05/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS56650( GV)04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station orselect the station by using the memory buttons,which you can set to any desired frequency.These four methods are described below.

*[AS56660( GV)05/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function

*[AS56700( GV)03/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time by pressing andreleasing either the left (b) or right (a) sideof the “TUNE” button.

*[AS56750( GV)04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to anyallowable broadcast frequency, whether ornot a station is present on that frequency.(See All About Radio Frequencies in thissection.)

*[AS56800( GV)04/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS56850( GV)04/95] This feature on your radio allows you toautomatically select listenable stations up ordown the frequency band. Press the right(a) side of the “SEEK” button to select thenext listenable station up the frequency band.Press the left (b) side of the button to selectthe next listenable station down thefrequency band. By holding the button down,listenable stations can be passed over to reachthe desired station.

*[AS56900( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS56950( GV)04/95] Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin thescan mode up the frequency band, stoppingon each listenable station for approximatelyfive seconds.

*[AS57000( GV)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled station, press the “SCAN” buttonagain.


162

*[AS57050( GV)04/95] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

*[AS57100( GV)02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).

*[AS57150( GV)02/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttonsto the desired frequencies:

*[AS57200( GV)04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS57300( GV)04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and holdthe button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.

*[AS57350( GV)04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each stationmemory preset button you want to set.

[AS57375( GV)05/94] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnectedthe station memory preset buttons willneed to be reset.

*[AS57400( GV)02/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speakeroutput of your radio

*[AS57450( GV)04/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS57500( GV)03/95] Press the top (c) of the “BASS” button toincrease bass; press the bottom (d) of the“BASS” button to decrease bass.

*[AS57550( GV)04/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS57600( GV)03/95] Press the top (c) of the “TREBLE” button toincrease treble; press the bottom (d) of thetreble button to decrease treble.

*[AS57650( GV)04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS57700( GV)03/95] Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers. Press the top (c) of the “BAL”button to shift the sound to the rightspeakers, and press the bottom (d) of the“BAL” button to shift the sound to the leftspeakers.


163

*[AS57750( GV)04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS57800( GV)03/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. Press the top (c) of the “FADE”button to shift the sound to the frontspeakers, and press the bottom (d) of the“FADE” button to shift the sound to the backspeakers.

*[AS57850( GV)04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display showrelative levels of bass and treble, andpositions of speaker balance and faderfunctions (left to right, front to rear).

*[AS57900( GV)02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette TapePlayer

*[AS57950( GV)04/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use thecassette tape player or eject a tape.

*[AS58000( GV)02/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS58050( GV)09/94] Your cassette tape player is equipped withpower loading. Once you insert a tape and pushslightly (with the open edge to the right), theloading mechanism draws the tape the rest ofthe way in and play will begin after amomentary tape tightening process.

[AS58150( GV)04/94] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with theignition on whether or not the radiopower is on. Inserting a cassette tapewith the radio power off will turn theaudio system on. After the cassette isejected, radio play will return. Also,the antenna will be in the up positionwhenever the radio is playing but willgo down anytime the radio is notplaying (i.e., when a cassette orcompact disc is playing or when theradio power is off).


164

*[AS58200( GV)02/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS58250( GV)09/94] There are four ways to quickly locate a desiredselection on the tape. You can use the fastforward, rewind, “SEEK”, or “SCAN” function.Following are brief descriptions of each.

*[AS58300( GV)02/95] ❑Fast forwarding the tape

*[AS58350( GV)01/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”button. The radio will begin playing until fastforward is manually stopped (by pushing the“TAPE” button) or the end of the tape isreached.

*[AS58400( GV)01/95] At the end of the tape, the directionautomatically reverses and plays the otherside of the tape.

*[AS58450( GV)02/95] ❑Rewinding the tape

*[AS58500( GV)01/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.The radio will begin playing until rewind ismanually stopped (by pushing the “TAPE”button) or the beginning of the tape isreached.

*[AS58550( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function with your cassettetape player

*[AS58600( GV)03/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (a)side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward tothe next selection on the tape. Push the left(b) side to seek the previous tape selection.

*[AS58650( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function with yourcassette tape player

*[AS58700( GV)01/95] Press the “SCAN” button to begin theforward scan mode on the tape currentlyplaying, stopping on each tape selection forapproximately an eight-second sampling(display indicates “SC”).


165

*[AS58800( GV)01/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled tape selection, press “SCAN” asecond time.

*[AS58850( GV)02/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape beingplayed

*[AS58900( GV)01/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selectedby pressing the “SIDE 1-2” button.

*[AS58950( GV)02/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS59000( GV)01/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the“EJ” button. The radio will resume playing if theradio power is on. The tape cartridge can beejected with radio power (and/or ignition) on oroff.

*[AS59050( GV)01/95] How to store the tape

*[AS59100( GV)01/95] Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tapeplayer and resume radio play.

*[AS59150( GV)02/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS59200( GV)02/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufacturedunder license from Dolby LabsLicensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

*[AS59250( GV)04/95] Push the k button to activate Dolby B NoiseReduction. Push again to deactivate.


166

*[AS59860( GV)02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player andTapes

*[AS59870( GV)02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape playerperforming the way it was meant to, read andfollow these simple precautions:

*[AS59880( GV)02/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge toclean the tape player head after 10-12 hoursof play will help maintain the best playbacksound and proper tape operation.

*[AS59890( GV)02/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long orless should be used. Tapes longer than 90minutes are thinner and subject to breakageor may jam the tape player mechanism.

*[AS59900( GV)02/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to directsunlight, high humidity and extreme heat orcold. If they are exposed to extremeconditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS59910( GV)02/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten itbefore playing by putting your finger or apencil into one of the holes and turning thehub until the tape is tight.

*[AS59920( GV)01/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can becomelodged in the mechanism. Remove any looselabel material before inserting cassette.

*[AS59930( GV)01/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tapeplayer. High heat in the vehicle can cause thecassette to warp.


167

%*[AS60900( ALL)02/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions

*[AS61000( ALL)02/95] Several conditions prevent FM reception frombeing completely clear and noise-free, such asthe following:

*[AS61100( ALL)04/95] 1. Distance/Strength

*[AS61200( ALL)02/95] The strength of the FM signal is directly relatedto the distance the signal must travel. Thelistenable range of an average FM signal isapproximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyondthis distance, the radio is operating in a fringearea and the signal becomes weaker.

*[AS61300( ALL)06/90] NOTE: Always make sure your antenna(whether you have a power antenna ora manually adjustable antenna) is fullyextended to the maximum length forproper reception. If your antenna is notfully extended, you may experiencesignal loss while traveling in fringereception areas.

*[AS61400( ALL)04/95] 2. Terrain

*[AS61500( ALL)02/95] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) ofthe area over which the signal travels mayprevent the FM signal from being noise-free.

*[AS61700( ALL)01/95] If there is a building or large structure betweenthe antenna and station, some of the signal“bends” around the building, but certain spotsreceive almost no signal. Moving out of the“shadow” of the structure will allow the stationto return to normal.


168

*[AS61800( ALL)01/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects orstructures, the reflected signal cancels the normalsignal, causing the antenna to pick up noise anddistortion. Cancellation effects are mostprominent in metropolitan areas, but also canbecome quite severe in hilly terrain anddepressed roadways.

*[AS61900( ALL)01/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/monoblend circuit has been incorporated into thissystem. This feature automatically switches aweak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,which improves the quality of reception.

*[AS62000( ALL)01/95] Several sources of static are normal conditionson AM frequencies. These can be caused bypower lines, electric fences, traffic lights andthunderstorms.

*[AS62100( ALL)01/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong SignalCapture and Overload. This can occur whenlistening to a weak station and when passinganother broadcast tower. The close station maycapture the more distant station, although thedisplayed frequency does not change. Whilepassing the tower, the station may switch backand forth a few times before returning to theoriginal station.

*[AS62200( ALL)01/95] When several broadcast towers are present(common in metropolitan areas) several stationsmay overload the receiver, resulting inconsiderable station changing, mixing anddistortion.

*[AS62300( ALL)01/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AMand FM bands has been incorporated into thissystem to reduce strong signal capture andoverload.


169

%*[AS62400( ALL)08/89] All About Radio Frequencies

*[AS62500( ALL)01/95] The Federal Communications Commission (FCC)and the Canadian Radio TelecommunicationsCommission (CRTC) establishes the frequenciesthat AM and FM radio stations may use fortheir broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are,AM: 530, 540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps;FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHzsteps.

*[AS62600( ALL)01/95] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a givenarea. This radio will tune to each of thesefrequencies using MANUAL TUNE and no finetuning is necessary as radio stations may not useother frequencies.

*[AS62700( ALL)02/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a“rounded-off” frequency which is not thefrequency they actually broadcast on. Forexample, a radio station that is assigned afrequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99”even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FMbroadcast frequency.


170

%*[AS62800( ALL)01/95] Important Warranty and ServiceInformation

*[AS62900( ALL)07/90] ❑Warranty

*[AS63000( ALL)03/95] Your sound system is warranted for three yearsor 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichevercomes first. Consult your vehicle warrantybooklet for further information. Ask your dealerfor a copy of this limited warranty.

*[AS63200( ALL)07/90] ❑Service

*[AS63300( ALL)01/95] At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audiosystems with a comprehensive service and repairprogram. If anything should go wrong withyour Ford audio system, return to your dealerfor service. There is a nationwide network ofqualified Ford authorized repair centers to assistyou.


171

Driving Your GrandMarquis

%*[DR00500( ALL)03/93] Driving with an AutomaticOverdrive Transmission

*[DR00700( BCGV)01/95] The automatic overdrive transmission operatesvery much like a regular automatic transmission,except it offers the extra overdrive feature.

%*[DR00800( ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear

*[DR00950( ALL)01/93] RWARNING

Hold the brake pedal down while youmove the gearshift lever from position toposition. If you do not hold the brakepedal down, your vehicle may moveunexpectedly and injure someone.

*[DR00960( GV)01/95] To move the shifter out of P (Park), the ignitionkey must be turned to either the OFF or the ONposition. This vehicle is also equipped with thebrake shift interlock safety feature whichprevents shifting the transmission out of theP (Park) position without the brake pedal beingdepressed if the key is in the ON position.

*[DR00975( ALL)03/95] To operate:

*[DR00980( ALL)01/95] 1. Start the engine.

*[DR00985( ALL)01/95] 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

*[DR00990( ALL)01/95] 3. Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park).

File:rcdrg.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 08:04:02 1996

172

%*[DR00995( ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake ShiftInterlock safety feature. This feature prevents thegearshift from being moved from the P (Park)position until the brake pedal is depressed. Thisfeature is active when the ignition is in the ONposition. If the gearshift lever CANNOT bemoved from P (Park) with the brake pedaldepressed:

*[DR01000( ALL)01/95] 1. Turn the engine off and remove the ignitionkey.

*[DR01005( ALL)01/95] 2. Apply parking brake.

*[DR01010( ALL)01/95] 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwiseto the first position (OFF).

*[DR01020( ALL)01/95] 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshiftlever to N (Neutral) and start the engine.


DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTILYOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPSARE WORKING.

*[DR01027( ALL)05/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using thealternate procedure described above, it ispossible that a fuse has blown and that yourbrakelamps may also not be functional. Pleaserefer to the chapter titled Servicing Your GrandMarquis in this Owner Guide for instructions onchecking and replacing fuses.


173

% [DR01050( GV)03/95]

half page art:0010213-F

The positions of the gearshift

*[DR01500( ALL)11/94] Once the gearshift is secure in the desiredposition, release the brake pedal and use theaccelerator as necessary.

%*[DR01700( ALL)01/95] R (Reverse)

*[DR01800( ALL)02/95] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,the vehicle will move backward. You shouldalways come to a complete stop before shiftinginto or out of R (Reverse).

*[DR01830( ALL)01/95] N (Neutral)

[DR01860( ALL)05/94] In N (Neutral), the wheels of the transmissionare not locked. Your vehicle will roll freely, evenon the slightest incline, unless the parking brakeor brakes are on.


174

%*[DR01900( ALL)01/95] Driving

*[DR01930( GV)01/95] Your vehicle’s gearshift is on the steeringcolumn. The Transmission Control Switch (TCS)is located on the end of the gearshift lever. TheTransmission Control Indicator Light (O/D OFF)is located on the instrument panel. You can putthe gearshift lever in any of the severalpositions.

*[DR01950( GV)01/95] The O/D OFF light is off (not illuminated)during normal vehicle operation. This allows thetransmission to upshift and downshift from 1stthrough 4th gears. When the TCS is pressed, theTransmission Control Indicator Light willilluminate (O/D OFF) on the instrument panel.When this O/D OFF is illuminated thetransmission will upshift and downshift from 1stthrough 3rd gears.

[DR01957( ALL)11/94] If the O/D OFF light does not come “on” whenthe TCS is depressed or if the light “FLASHES”when you are driving, have your vehicleserviced at the first opportunity. If this conditionpersists, damage could occur to the transmission.

*[DR01961( BCGV)01/95] To return the transmission to normal operation(1st through 4th gear) depress the TCS again.This switch may be used to cancel overdrive anytime the vehicle is being driven. Each time yourvehicle is started, the overdrive system willautomatically be in the normal overdrive modeand the light will not be illuminated.


175

%*[DR02000( GV)04/95] When to use j (Overdrive)

*[DR02100( ALL)01/95] Overdrive is the usual driving position for anautomatic overdrive transmission. It works thesame way Drive works, automatically upshiftingor downshifting as the vehicle speeds or slows.

*[DR02200( ALL)01/95] However, Overdrive also shifts into a fourthgear —an overdrive gear — when your vehiclecruises at an appropriate consistent speed forany length of time. This fourth gear will increaseyour fuel economy when you travel at cruisingspeeds.

[DR02520( GV)05/95] When to use j (Overdrive) — withTransmission Control Switch activated(TCS)

[DR02603( GV)01/94] Overdrive may not be appropriate for certainterrain. If the transmission shifts back and forthbetween Third and Fourth gears while you aredriving on hilly roads or if your vehicle doesnot have adequate power for climbing hills,press the TCS located on the shift lever.

*[DR02605( BCGV)01/95] You can depress the TCS at any speed.

*[DR02610( ALL)01/95] When to use 2 (Second)

*[DR02620( ALL)01/95] Use 2 (Second) for start-up on slippery roads orto give you more engine braking to slow yourvehicle on downgrades.

*[DR02700( ALL)01/95] When to use 1 (Low)

*[DR02800( ALL)03/95] Use 1 (Low) when driving down steep grades. Itgives more engine braking to slow your vehiclethan 2 (Second) on the downgrades. You canupshift from 1 (Low) to 2 (Second) or from1 (Low) to Overdrive at any speed.


176

*[DR03000( ALL)01/95] P (Park)

*[DR03100( ALL)01/95] Always come to a complete stop before you shiftinto P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park). This locks thetransmission and prevents the rear wheels fromrotating.




Never leave your vehicle unattendedwhile it is running.

*[DR03300( GV)01/95] You can tell a column-mounted gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park) if the lever isadjacent to the P (Park) and you cannot move itwithout pulling it toward you and rotating itdownward.

% [DR09720( ALL)03/95] Traction-Lok Axle (If equipped)[DR09730( ALL)12/91] This axle provides added traction on slippery

surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on apoor traction surface. Under normal conditionsthe Traction-Lok axle functions as a standardrear axle.

*[DR09740( ALL)03/93] Extended use of other than matching size tireson a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in apermanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss ofeffectiveness does not affect normal driving andshould not be noticeable to the driver.


177


To avoid injury, never run the enginewith one wheel off the ground, such aswhen changing a tire.

%*[DR09760( BCGV)03/95] Traction AssistTM (If equipped)

*[DR09770( BCGV)01/95] Your vehicle may be equipped with the optionalTraction AssistTM system. This system helpsprevent wheel spin in order to improve tiretraction and is an especially useful feature whenyou drive in hilly areas or on slippery, icy orsnowy roads.

*[DR09780( BCGV)03/95] Traction AssistTM works automatically by rapidlyapplying and releasing the brakes to prevent oneor both of the rear drive wheels from spinningduring acceleration.

[DR09785( BCGV)03/95] During the Traction AssistTM function, whichmost often occurs during low speed accelerationon slippery surfaces, a noise may be heardcoming from the engine compartment. This noiseis created by the ABS pump and is normal andmay last for a few seconds during theacceleration of the vehicle.

*[DR09790( BCGV)03/95] In general, this system improves your vehicle’sstability and acceleration performance when roadconditions warrant. Traction AssistTM is fullyeffective up to approximately 25 mph(40 km/h). At 25 mph (40 km/h) the functionbegins to taper off until it no longer operatesabove 34 mph (55 km/h).


178

[DR09793( BCGV)01/95] If the Traction AssistTM system is cycledexcessively, the system will shut down toprevent the rear brakes from overheating.During this shutdown period, the word OFF inthe traction assist switch will be illuminatedshowing that the traction assist system isinoperative. A cooling down period is requiredto prevent damage to the rear brakes. This timeperiod varies and depends on brake usageduring the cooling down period. Anti-Lockbraking is not affected and will functionnormally during the cool down period.

[DR09795( BCGV)05/95] NOTE: Traction-Lok axles are not an availableoption on vehicles equipped withtraction assist.

*[DR09800( ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle%*[DR09900( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power

steering uses energy from the engine to helpsteer your vehicle.

%*[DR09950( ALL)04/95] If the amount of effort needed to steer yourvehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, havethe power steering system checked. If the powersteering system breaks down (or if the engine isturned off), you can steer the vehicle manuallybut it takes more effort.

*[DR10000( ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extremeright or left for more than five seconds if theengine is running. This can damage the powersteering pump.


179

[DR10200( BCGV)12/94] Speed Sensitive Power Steering(If equipped)

*[DR10400( GV)01/95] The steering system in your vehicle is speedsensitive. This means that the steering effort islight for parking and heavier for highwaydriving. However, if you have to swerve aroundan object or another vehicle, your steering willhave full power assist.

%*[DR10500( ALL)03/95] Brakes%*[DR10600( ALL)01/95] Applying the Brakes

[DR10650( ALL)05/95] Braking non ABS brakes[DR11060( GV)12/91] Your vehicle has front and rear disc brakes with

anti-lock (optional). They adjust automatically asthe brake pads wear down.

*[DR11100( ALL)04/95] Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the“squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedalwith a steadily increasing force. This allows thewheels to continue to roll while you are slowingdown, which lets you steer properly.

[DR11300( ALL)03/95] On vehicles without anti-lock brakes, extremebraking can make the wheels lock and slide,possibly decreasing your control of the steering.If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedaland repeat the “squeeze” technique.

[DR11310( ALL)05/95] Braking with ABS brakes[DR11400( ALL)03/95] On vehicles with anti-lock brakes, the wheels

will not lock and slide when you press downhard on the brake pedal. The anti-lock brakesautomatically start releasing and reapplying thefront brakes independently and the rear brakestogether whenever your wheels start to lock. Donot “pump” the brake pedal on vehiclesequipped with anti-lock brakes. When thishappens, you will feel the brake pedal pulse.This “pulse” may be an unfamiliar feeling but itis normal and indicates the ABS is working asdesigned.


180

*[DR11650( ALL)05/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the brakepedal; you will wear out the linings and increaseyour vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotordamage may also eventually occur.

*[DR11700( ALL)03/95] NOTE: If you are driving down a long orsteep hill, shift to a lower gear and donot apply your brakes continuously. Ifyou apply your brakes continuously,they may overheat and become lesseffective.

%*[DR11800( ALL)03/95] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderatestops does not affect the function of the brakesystem and is normal. However, if the squealbecomes louder or more frequent, have yourbrakes inspected by your dealer or a qualifiedservice technician.

[DR11900( ALL)05/94] Ford Motor Company has not found anydetrimental effects of popular mobile radiotransmitting equipment installed on vehicleswith the anti-lock brake system, if the equipmentis installed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. However, if mobile radiotransmitting equipment is installed in yourvehicle and, if either the anti-lock brake systemcycles or the check anti-lock light comes on atany time other than right after you turn the keyto ON or during a sudden stop, have yourmobile radio dealer inspect the installation.

%*[DR12000( ALL)03/95] Parking Brake

*[DR12050( ALL)01/95] The parking brake should be used wheneveryou park your vehicle.

[DR12500( BCGV)03/95] The parking brake pedal is suspended just belowthe bottom of the instrument panel to the left ofthe brake pedal.


181

[DR13000( GV)03/95] To manually set the parking brake after parkingyour vehicle, apply the brake pedal with yourright foot and hold it while you push theparking brake down firmly and fully with yourleft foot. The brake system warning light willglow. The parking brake will not set with thetransmission in any forward gear position.

[DR13600( GV)03/94]

one third page art:0010319-E

The parking brake

*[DR13800( BCGV)05/95] RWARNING


*[DR14125( GV)01/95] Your vehicle has an automatic parking brakerelease. As you move the gearshift selector toany forward gear with the engine running, theparking brake automatically releases. Yourparking brake will not release automaticallywhen you shift into R (Reverse). To release theparking brake manually, pull the brake releasehandle [marked (P)] located on the lower leftcorner of the instrument panel. The pedal is nowreleased and will reset the next time you pressthe pedal. The Brake System Warning Light willglow if the parking brake is not fully releasedwhen the engine is running.


182

*[DR14175( GV)11/91] RWARNING

To prevent personal injury, do not releasethe parking brake while outside thevehicle.

*[DR14200( ALL)03/95] Always check the Brake Warning Light eachtime you start your engine. Driving with theparking brake on will cause the brakes to wearout quickly and will reduce the fuel economy.


If the parking brake is fully released, butthe Brake System light remains on, havethe brakes checked immediately. Theymay not be working properly.

[DR14400( ALL)07/93] The parking brake system is designed for staticparking only and is not designed to stop amoving vehicle, but you can use the parkingbrake to stop your vehicle in an emergency ifthe normal brakes fail. However, since theparking brake applies only the rear brakes, thestopping distance will increase greatly and thehandling of your vehicle will be adverselyaffected.

% [DR14415( GV)05/94] Rear Air Suspension System(If equipped)

[DR14425( GV)10/90] If your vehicle is equipped with an automaticload leveling rear air suspension system, it willmaintain the rear vehicle height at a constantlevel by automatically adding air or releasing airfrom the rear air springs to offset changes invehicle loads.

[DR14430( GV)03/94] A shutoff switch is located in the trunk on theright hand vertical trim panel. If this switch is inthe OFF position, the automatic leveling systemwill not operate. The switch should be OFF


183

whenever jacking up or towing the vehicle. Ifyou have the mechanical cluster, “AIR SUSP”will appear in the cluster, if you have anelectronic cluster, “CHECK AIR SUSPENSION”will appear in the message center when theignition switch is in the ON position, and eitherthe shutoff switch is in the OFF position, or asystem fault has been detected.

*[DR14440( GV)01/95] Normal vehicle operation does not require anyaction by the driver.


On vehicles equipped with AirSuspension, turn OFF the Air Suspensionswitch prior to jacking, hoisting or towingyour vehicle.

[DR14460( GV)03/92]


The air suspension switch — located on the right-handvertical trim panel


184

*[DR14500( ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions%*[DR14600( ALL)01/95] Tips for Safe Driving

*[DR14700( ALL)03/95] As with any new vehicle, yours may drive andhandle differently from your previous vehicle.Use care until you become accustomed to itsvarious features and driving characteristics.

*[DR14800( ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits.Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, orcombinations of these maneuvers can cause avehicle to behave differently than anticipated.

%*[DR15200( ALL)01/95] Driving in Bad Weather

%*[DR15300( ALL)01/95] Slippery roads

*[DR15400( ALL)03/95] Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads:

*[DR15500( ALL)03/95] ❑Do not quickly move the steering wheelunless necessary.

*[DR15600( ALL)01/95] ❑Drive slower than you normally would.

[DR15700( ALL)03/95] ❑Do not use speed control.

*[DR15800( ALL)01/95] ❑Give your vehicle more distance to stop.

*[DR15900( ALL)03/92] ❑Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly toavoid locking your wheels. (Does not applyto vehicles with anti-lock brakes.)

*[DR16000( ALL)02/93] ❑Consider using one of the lower gears.

*[DR16200( BCGV)01/93] RWARNING

To avoid skidding and losing control onslippery roads, do not downshift into First(1) when you are moving faster than20 mph (32 km/h).


185


If your vehicle has speed control, do notuse it on slippery roads. You could losecontrol of your vehicle and could injuresomeone.

[DR16250( GV)05/94] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mudor snow), you may try to “rock” it out of thespot. Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forward(2 [Second] gear is the recommended forwardgear) and reverse gears. At the same time, presslightly on the accelerator.


Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph(55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure apassenger or bystander.

[DR16500( ALL)12/94] By moving the vehicle backward and forward,you may gain enough momentum to move outof the spot. Do not rock the vehicle for morethan a few minutes. This may overheat theengine, damage the transmission, or damage thetires. If you are still stuck after a minute or twoof rocking, call for a tow truck.

%*[DR16700( ALL)01/95] High water

*[DR16800( ALL)01/95] Do not drive through flooded areas unless youare sure that the water is below the bottom ofthe wheel rims.

*[DR16900( ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, driveslowly. You may have limited traction or wetbrakes, so allow extra stopping distance becauseyour vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.

*[DR17000( ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water,apply your brakes gently several times as yourvehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry thebrakes.


186

%*[DR17100( ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load

*[DR17200( ALL)01/95] There are limits to the amount of weight yourvehicle can carry or tow. The total weight ofyour vehicle, plus the weight of the passengersand cargo, should never be more than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weightthat your vehicle carries over the front axle andrear axle should never be more than the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respectiveaxle.

% [DR17300( ALL)05/94] You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWRon the Safety Compliance Certification Label onthe left front door lock facing or the door latchpost pillar.

*[DR17400( ALL)01/95] The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affectthe GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage ofreplacement tires with higher weight limit thanoriginals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.Usage of lower capacity replacement tires maylower GVWR and GAWR limitations.


If the GVWR or the GAWR specified onthe Safety Compliance Certification Labelis exceeded, your vehicle may be damagedor you may lose control and injuresomeone.

%*[DR17503( ALL)01/95] Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load

*[DR17506( ALL)01/95] The load that you add to your vehicle must notexceed the maximum load stated on the SafetyCompliance Certification Decal attached to theleft front door pillar.


187

*[DR17509( ALL)01/95] To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, addthe weights of:

*[DR17512( ALL)01/95] ❑ the driver and passengers

*[DR17515( ALL)01/95] ❑ luggage and any other items that you put inyour vehicle

*[DR17518( ALL)01/95] ❑ the tongue load of the loaded trailer

*[DR17521( ALL)01/95] ❑ the weight of any equipment that has beenadded to your vehicle since it was deliveredto your dealer

*[DR17524( ALL)01/95] If you do not know the actual weights of theseitems, use the following procedure to figure theweight of a load:

*[DR17527( ALL)01/95] 1. Weigh your vehicle without the driver,passengers and luggage. You might takeyour vehicle to a shipping company or aninspection station for trucks.

*[DR17530( ALL)01/95] 2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver,passengers and luggage.

*[DR17533( ALL)01/95] 3. Subtract the first reading from the second tofigure the total weight of the load.

*[DR17536( ALL)01/95] After determining this load, you must also makesure that the total weight of your vehicle, plusthe load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also,make sure that the weight your vehicle carriesover each axle is less than the GAWR for therespective axle.

*[DR17539( ALL)01/95] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargofrom your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicleexceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the loador remove cargo accordingly.


188


Improper distribution of your vehicle’sload or carrying weight in excess of theamount shown on the tire decal can causerapid tire wear or loss of vehicle control.

%*[DR17600( GV)01/95] Trailer Towing (may requiretrailer tow option package)

*[DR17650( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle does not come from the factoryfully equipped to tow. No towing packages areavailable through Ford or Lincoln/Mercurydealers.

*[DR17700( ALL)01/95] Because towing a trailer puts extra strain onyour vehicle, you must follow certainprecautions for your safety and the good of yourvehicle:

*[DR17800( ALL)01/95] ❑Stay within the load limits for towing yourvehicle. (See Trailer towing specifications in thischapter.)

*[DR17900( ALL)01/95] ❑Carefully and thoroughly prepare yourvehicle for towing, making sure to use theright equipment and to attach it properly.(See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)

*[DR18000( ALL)01/95] ❑Use extra caution when driving your vehiclewhile you tow. (See Driving while you tow inthis chapter.)

*[DR18100( ALL)01/95] ❑Service your vehicle more frequently if youtow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if youtow in this chapter.)


189

*[DR18175( ALL)01/95] Ten to 15% of the loaded trailer’s weight shouldbe on the tongue. However, the tongue loadshould never exceed 10% of the maximumweight that your vehicle can safely tow.


Do not tow a trailer when the temporaryspare tire is being used.

[DR18300( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towingvehicle. The amount of weight that you cansafely tow depends on the optional equipmenton your vehicle. See the following chart.

% [DR18400( ALL)03/90] Trailer towing specifications

[DR18650( G )05/95]

ten pica chart:0010322-D


190

*[DR20900( ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow

*[DR21000( ALL)01/95] For your safety and for the good of yourvehicle, use the right equipment for the type oftrailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towingequipment is properly attached to your vehicle.If you are not certain that you are using theright equipment in the proper manner, see yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[DR21100( ALL)01/95] Do not use hitches that clamp onto yourvehicle’s bumper. The bumper is not designed tobear the load.

*[DR21125( ALL)01/95] Always check the pressure in all your vehicle’stires when preparing to tow (see inflationrecommendation on the tire label).

%*[DR21150( ALL)01/95] Using the hitch

*[DR21300( G )05/95] Your vehicle uses one of two types of hitches,depending on how much your trailer weighs.The Class I hitch will allow you to tow a trailerweighing up to 2,000 lbs. (907 kg.). Because thistype of hitch places the tongue load of a traileron the rear wheels of your vehicle, you mustdistribute the load in your trailer so that only 10to 15% of the total weight of the trailer is on thetongue.

*[DR21400( G )05/95] A Class III hitch and the optional trailer tow IIIpackage will allow you to tow a trailer weighingup to 5,000 lbs. (2,270 kg.). This type of hitchdistributes the tongue load of a trailer evenlybetween the front and rear wheels of yourvehicle and the trailer wheels.

*[DR21600( ALL)01/95] Tie down the load so that it does not shift andchange the weight on the hitch. This willprevent damage to your vehicle and make yourvehicle easier to handle.


191

*[DR21605( G )05/95] Hook-Up and Adjustment Procedure —Load Equalizing Hitch

*[DR21610( GV)01/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a rear airsuspension system. When hooking up a trailerusing a load equalizing hitch, always use thefollowing procedure:

*[DR21615( GV)01/95] 1. Place the unloaded vehicle on a levelsurface. With the ignition on and all doorsclosed, allow the vehicle to levelautomatically (approximately one to twominutes).

*[DR21620( GV)01/95] 2. Turn the air suspension switch on the rightside of the trunk to OFF.

*[DR21625( GV)01/95] 3. Measure the height of a reference point onthe front and rear bumpers at the center ofthe vehicle.

*[DR21630( GV)01/95] 4. Attach trailer to vehicle and adjust the hitchequalizer(s) so that the front bumper heightis 0 to 1/2 inch below the unloaded height.After adjustment, the rear bumper should beno higher than in step 3.

*[DR21635( GV)01/95] 5. Turn the air suspension switch ON.


Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rearbumper of the vehicle is lower or higherthan it was unloaded will defeat thefunction of the load equalizing hitch andmay cause unpredictable handling.


192

%*[DR21650( ALL)01/95] Connecting the safety chains

*[DR21700( ALL)01/95] Always attach the trailer’s safety chains to yourvehicle. They help protect your trailer if thehitch breaks.

*[DR21800( ALL)01/95] To connect the trailer’s safety chains:

*[DR21900( ALL)01/95] 1. Cross the chains under the trailer tongueand attach them to your vehicle’s frame orhook retainers. Never attach the safetychains to your vehicle’s bumper. The bumperis not designed to bear the weight of atrailer.

*[DR22000( ALL)01/95] 2. Make sure that you leave enough slack inthe chains to allow you to turn corners.

*[DR22100( ALL)01/95] If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructionsthat the rental agency gives you.

%*[DR22150( ALL)01/95] Connecting the trailer’s brakes

*[DR22200( ALL)01/95] Electric brakes and manual, automatic, orsurge-type hydraulic brakes are safe if youinstall them properly and adjust them accordingto the manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure thatyour trailer’s brakes meet local and federalregulations.

[DR22250( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optionaltrailer tow package, provisions have been madeunder the instrument panel for installation of anelectronic brake controller.


193


Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brakesystem directly to your vehicle’s brakesystem. Your vehicle may not haveenough braking power and your chancesof having a collision greatly increase.

%*[DR22350( ALL)01/95] Connecting the trailer’s lights

*[DR22400( ALL)01/95] Do not connect a trailer’s lighting systemwiring directly to your vehicle’s lighting systemwiring. To get the proper equipment forhooking up your trailer’s lights, see your localtrailer dealer and your Ford dealer. Be sure tofollow their instructions carefully.

[DR22450( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optionaltrailer tow package, the proper lamp wiring andequipment has been installed at the factory. Thetrailer feed wire (supplied in a box in theluggage compartment) needs a connectorcompatible with your trailer prior to installation.

*[DR22500( ALL)01/95] If you do not install trailer lights correctly, youmay cause damage to the vehicle’s lightingsystem.


194

%*[DR22600( ALL)01/95] Driving While You Tow

*[DR22650( ALL)01/95] Be especially careful when driving while youtow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph(70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country onhot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you canbrake gradually.

*[DR22800( GV)01/95] When you tow down steep grades, move thegearshift to 1 (Low). It gives more enginebraking to slow your vehicle than Drive on thedowngrades.

*[DR22900( GV)01/95] If you tow in D (Overdrive) while ridingthrough hilly country, your vehicle mayfrequently shift between Overdrive and Thirdgears. To prevent your vehicle from shifting toomuch, press the Transmission Control Switchlocated on the shift lever. This will also give theengine more power going up hills and betterengine braking going down hills.

%*[DR23000( ALL)01/95] If you use the speed control while you aretowing on very long, steep grades, the speedcontrol may shut off.

*[DR23100( ALL)01/95] Servicing your vehicle if you tow

*[DR23200( ALL)08/93] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, yourvehicle will need to be serviced more frequentlythan usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule andRecord booklet for additional information.


195

Roadside Emergencies

%*[RE00400( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle

*[RE00450( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave thelights on or any electrical equipment on afteryou turn the engine off. If this happens, youmay be able to jump-start from a booster batteryto start your vehicle.

*[RE00500( ALL)02/95] RWARNING

The gases around the battery can explodeif exposed to flames, sparks, or litcigarettes. An explosion could result ininjury or vehicle damage.


To protect yourself when charging abattery, always shield your face and eyes.Make sure that you can breathe fresh air.

%*[RE00700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Applying too much pressure on the endswhen lifting a battery could cause acid tospill. Lift the battery with a carrier orwith your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[RE00800( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burnsskin, eyes, and clothing.

*[RE00900( ALL)05/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, orclothing, immediately flush the area with waterfor at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows theacid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water

File:rcreg.exUpdate:Thu Feb 1 08:33:27 1996

196

first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, orvegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.

*[RE01000( ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery,and to avoid injury to yourself, follow thesedirections for preparing your vehicle tojump-start and connecting the jumper cables inthe order they are given. If in doubt, call forroad service.

*[RE01100( ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle

[RE01150( ALL)11/90] NOTE: also see label on battery.

*[RE01200( ALL)03/95] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, soyou need to use a 12-volt jumper system.You will damage your starting motor,ignition system, and other electrical parts ifyou connect them to a 24-volt power supply(either two 12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt generator set).

*[RE01300( ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabledvehicle. You could damage the vehicle’selectrical system.

*[RE01400( ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood ofthe disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehiclesdo not touch each other. Set the parkingbrake on both vehicles and stay clear of theengine cooling fan and other moving parts.

*[RE01500( ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove anyexcessive corrosion before you attach thejumper cables.

*[RE01600( ALL)02/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles.Turning on the fan helps protect theelectrical system from voltage surges. Turnoff all other switches and lights in bothvehicles to prevent possible damage to eithervehicle’s electrical systems.


197

%*[RE01700( ALL)05/95] Connecting the jumper cables

*[RE01800( ALL)03/95] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the dischargedbattery. (You can connect either jumper cableto the positive (+) terminal, as long as youuse the same cable for both positiveterminals.) Most jumper cables have a redcable and a black cable. The red cable isgenerally used for the positive terminals andthe black for the negative ones.

*[RE01900( ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the boosterbattery.

*[RE02000( ALL)03/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to thenegative (s) terminal of the booster battery— NOT to the discharged battery.

[RE02100( ALL)01/95] 4. Connect the other end of that cable to agood metallic surface on the engine or frameof the disabled vehicle making sure it isclear of any rotating engine components. Thefollowing illustrations show where you canfind a metallic surface.


Do not connect the end of the secondcable to the negative (s) terminal of thebattery to be jumped. A spark may causean explosion of the gases that surroundthe battery.


198

[RE02700( GV)03/94]

full page art:0010336-F

The 4.6L SFI engine


199

*[RE02900( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting

*[RE03000( ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not inthe way of moving engine parts, then startthe booster vehicle. Run the engine at amoderate speed.

*[RE03100( ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a fewminutes and then start the disabled vehicle.It may take a couple of tries before thevehicle starts. If the vehicle does not startafter several attempts, there may be adifferent problem.

*[RE03200( ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let themidle for a few minutes to charge thedischarged battery.

%*[RE03300( ALL)03/95] Removing jumper cables

*[RE03400( ALL)03/95] 1. Always remove the jumper cables in thereverse order. Remove the negative (s) endof the jumper cable from the metallic surfaceon the engine or frame of the disabledvehicle.

*[RE03500( ALL)03/95] 2. Remove the negative (s) cable from thebooster battery.

*[RE03600( ALL)03/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from thebooster battery.

*[RE03700( ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+)cable from the discharged battery.

*[RE03800( ALL)04/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a whileto let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions.Drive it around for a while with all electricalaccessories turned off to let the battery recharge.You may need to use a battery charger to fullyrecharge the battery.


200

%*[RE03900( ALL)03/95] Changing a Tire

*[RE04000( ALL)01/95] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, donot apply the brake heavily. Instead, graduallydecrease the speed. Hold the steering wheelfirmly and slowly move to a safe place on theside of the road. Park on a level spot, turn offthe ignition, set the parking brake, and turn onthe hazard flashers.

%*[RE04100( ALL)03/95] The Temporary Spare Tire

*[RE04200( GV)03/95] You may have a high pressure temporary sparetire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tireand is designed for emergency use only. Use itonly when you get a flat tire and replace it assoon as you can. This spare tire is marked withthe words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so thatyou can easily identify it.

*[RE04250( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Extended use of other thanconventional spare tires on aTraction-Lok rear axle could result in apermanent reduction in effectiveness.This loss of effectiveness does notaffect normal driving and should notbe noticeable to the driver.


If you use the temporary spare tirecontinuously or do not follow theseprecautions, the tire could fail, causingyou to lose control of the vehicle, possiblyinjuring yourself or others.


201

*[RE04400( ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire,DO NOT:

*[RE04500( ALL)01/95] ❑exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under anycircumstances.

*[RE04600( ALL)01/95] ❑ load your vehicle so that it is heavier thanthe maximum vehicle load rating listed onthe tire decal.

*[RE04700( ALL)01/95] ❑ tow a trailer.

*[RE04800( ALL)01/95] ❑use tire chains on this tire.

*[RE04900( ALL)01/95] ❑ try to repair the temporary spare tire orremove it from its wheel.

*[RE05000( ALL)01/95] ❑use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.

*[RE05100( ALL)01/95] ❑drive through an automatic car wash withthis tire. Because the temporary spare tire issmaller than a conventional tire, it reducesthe ground clearance. Your vehicle may getcaught in the rails and it could be damaged.

% [RE05200( GV)11/94] Using the Conventional Spare Tire(If equipped)

*[RE05300( GV)01/95] If you have the conventional spare tire, you canuse it as a spare or as a regular tire. This sparetire is identical to the other tires that come withyour vehicle, although the wheel may not match.


202

%*[RE05500( ALL)03/95] Spare Tire Location

[RE05600( ALL)11/90] The spare is stored in the trunk.

[RE06100( GV)03/94]

two third page art:0010341-H

The spare tire location

%*[RE06500( ALL)02/95] To remove the spare tire:

[RE06900( GV)12/91] 1. Lift off the spare tire cover (if equipped).

*[RE07000( GV)01/95] 2. Unscrew the wing-nut holding down thespare tire.

[RE07100( GV)11/90] 3. Lift out the spare tire.


203

%*[RE07300( ALL)03/95] Preparing to Change the Tire

*[RE07525( BCGV)03/95] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not moveor roll. Put the gearshift in P (Park). Set theparking brake and block the wheel that isdiagonally opposite the tire that you arechanging.

[RE07550( BCGV)05/95] When one of the back wheels is off the ground,the transmission alone will not prevent thevehicle from moving or slipping off the jack,even if the vehicle is in P (Park). To prevent thevehicle from moving when you change a tire, besure the parking brake is set, then block thewheel (both directions) that is diagonallyopposite (other side and end of the vehicle) tothe tire being changed.


If the vehicle slips off the jack, you orsomeone else could be seriously injured.

[RE07655( GV)12/94] Turn off the air suspension switch (if equipped)prior to jacking.

*[RE07657( GV)05/95] RWARNING


[RE07660( GV)05/92]


The air suspension switch — located in the trunk


204


To avoid injury, never run the enginewith one wheel off the ground, such aswhen changing a tire.

*[RE07900( ALL)05/95] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack.

*[RE07960( GV)05/95] RWARNING


[RE08050( GV)06/92] 3. Remove any optional wheel covers or wheelornaments with the tapered end of a wheelnut wrench. Insert the handle of the wrenchand twist it against the inner wheel coverflange. For more about removing wheelcovers, see the information later in thissection.

*[RE08125( GV)01/95] 4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turncounterclockwise, but do not remove themuntil the tire is raised off the ground. Youshould pull up on the handle rather thanpush to develop maximum force to loosenwheel lug nuts.


205

%*[RE08150( ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing the Tire

[RE08300( GV)12/94] 1. Find the jacking location notches(a depression on plastic moulding) near thetire that you are changing. Align the twotabs on jack with rectangular notch on sheetmetal. Slowly push jack straight until thetabs are against the side of the frame. MAKESURE THE JACK IS PROPERLYPOSITIONED UNDER THE FRAME. Turnthe handle of the jack clockwise until thewheel is completely off the ground.


To lessen the risk of personal injury, donot put any part of your body under thevehicle while changing a tire. Do not startthe engine when your vehicle is on thejack. The jack is only meant for changingthe tire.

[RE08550( ALL)10/92]


The improper lift point


206

[RE08570( ALL)05/92] NOTE: Never use the differential housing as alift point.

% [RE08700( GV)11/90]


Jacking locations

[RE08725( GV)03/92]


Locating the notch for the jack — rear wheels

[RE08750( GV)03/92]


Locating the notch for the jack — front wheels

*[RE08900( ALL)01/95] 2. Turn the jack handle clockwise until thewheel clears the ground. Remove the wheellug nuts.


207

[RE08915( GV)01/96] 3. If you are replacing the front tire (withaluminum wheels) with the temporary sparetire, you need to remove the black dustshield. Gently pull the shield over the rubbero-rings and slide it off the wheel studs.Because the rubber o-rings are soft, theyshould pass through the holes in the shield.If the rings do not pass through the holes,remove them from the wheel studs. Save theblack dust shield for future use, and ensurethe rubber o-rings are removed from wheelstuds.

*[RE08925( GV)01/96] 4. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,making sure that the air valve stem is facingoutward.

*[RE08945( GV)01/96] 5. Reinstall the lug nuts, tightening until thewheel is snug against the hub. The bevelededges on the lug nuts face inward. Do notfully tighten the lug nuts until you lower thevehicle. If you do, you could force thevehicle off the jack.

*[RE08965( GV)01/96] 6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise.

*[RE08985( GV)01/96] 7. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lugnuts in the order shown in the followingillustration. As soon as possible, have yourdealer or a qualified service technician checkthe lug nuts for proper torque specifications.

% [RE09100( ALL)03/93]


The lug nuts on the wheel


208

[RE09450( GV)01/96] 8. Place any wheel covers and ornaments in thetrunk.

*[RE09550( GV)01/96] 9. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Makesure the jack is securely fastened so it doesnot rattle when you drive.

*[RE09650( GV)01/96] 10. Unblock the wheels.[RE09675( GV)01/96] 11. Turn the air suspension ON (if so equipped).

[RE10000( GV)01/96] Installation of the black dust shield

[RE10100( GV)01/96] When installing the regular tire, reinstall theblack dust shield by orienting and sliding theshield until it is flush with the hub/rotorassembly.

%*[RE11805( GV)01/95] Aluminum wheel

[RE11806( GV)03/94]


The center wheel ornament

[RE11810( GV)05/93] Remove the center ornament from the wheelwith the tapered end of the wheel nut wrenchby inserting it under the notch, and rotating thehandle and then prying against the wheel.


209

*[RE11815( GV)01/95] Install the center ornament on the wheel and besure it is snapped into place all the way aroundusing the palm of the hand or a rubber mallet.

[RE11835( GV)05/92] Steel wheel with full wheelcover

[RE11837( GV)05/92]

half page art:0010615-C

Steel wheel with full wheelcover

[RE11838(M GV)03/93] Remove the wheelcover from the wheel usingthe flanged end of the wheel nut wrench byinserting the handle and then prying against theinner wheelcover flange.

[RE11842(M GV)03/93] Install the wheelcover on the wheel with thevalve stem extension in the wheel matching thehole in the wheelcover. Push by hand on theoutside edges of the wheelcover until it issnapped firmly in place on the wheel.


210

[RE11850( GV)11/92] NOTE: DO NOT USE A STEEL HAMMER.

[RE11900( GV)03/91] If you have the anti-theft locking spoked wheelcover, each wheel cover has a lock bolt behindthe center hub ornament. You need a special keywrench (stored in the glove box) to pry thisornament off and to remove the lock bolt. Donot lose this wrench or you will not be able toremove the wheel cover.

[RE12000( GV)05/95] The key wrench has a registration numberattached to it. Keep the registration number in asafe place. Complete the registration card andreturn it to the manufacturer as soon as you buythe vehicle. To replace the key wrench, send theI.D. card to the manufacturer.

*[RE13800( ALL)02/95] If the Engine Cranks But DoesNot Start or Does Not Start Aftera Collision

*[RE13810( ALL)04/95] The Fuel System Shut-off Switch

*[RE13900( ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or if youhave had a collision, the fuel system shut-offswitch may have been triggered. The shut-offswitch is a device that stops the fuel systemwhen your vehicle has been involved in asubstantial jolt.

*[RE14000( ALL)01/95] For information on how to check and reset thefuel system shut-off switch, see Fuel systemshut-off switch in the Index.


211

%*[RE14100( ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle[RE14201( ALL)01/96] If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact

a professional towing service or, if you are amember, your roadside assistance center.Recommended towing options include wheel lifttowing or flat bed towing.

*[RE14205( GV)01/96] Before your vehicle can be towed, the airsuspension switch in the luggage compartmentneeds to be turned to the OFF position. It isrecommended that your Grand Marquis betowed with wheel lift or flatbed equipment. Ifslingbelt equipment must be used, the towbarwill deform the soft fascia (bumper). However, itwill return to an acceptable shape.


212

*[RE14300( ALL)05/95]

three fourths page art:0001463-A

*[RE14400( ALL)05/95] When calling for a tow truck, tell the operatorwhat kind of vehicle you have. A towingmanual is available from Ford Motor Companyfor all authorized tow truck operators. Haveyour tow truck driver refer to this manual forthe proper hook-up and towing procedures foryour vehicle.


213

Customer Assistance

%*[HS00205( ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance

*[HS00210( ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour,seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operatorsthat put you in touch with the help you need ifyou experience a problem with your vehicle.This complimentary service is provided to youthroughout your warranty period of 3years/36,000 miles (3 years/60,000 km),whichever comes first. To purchase RoadsideAssistance coverages beyond this period,through Ford Auto Club, contact your Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer (not available inCanada).

*[HS00215( ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following:

*[HS00220( ALL)06/94] ❑Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.

*[HS00225( ALL)06/94] ❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.

*[HS00230( ALL)06/94] ❑Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.

*[HS00235( ALL)06/94] ❑Bring you fuel if you run out.

*[HS00240( ALL)06/94] ❑Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Evennon-warranty related tows, like accidents orgetting stuck in mud or snow, are covered(some exclusions apply, such as impoundtowing and repossession).

File:rchsg.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 08:03:34 1996

214

*[HS00245( ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance

*[HS00250( ALL)06/94] Your Roadside Assistance identification card canbe found in the Owner Guide portfolio in yourglove compartment. Complete the card and placeit in your wallet for quick reference.

*[HS00255( ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the UnitedStates call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00260( ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadsideassistance yourself, Ford Motor Company willreimburse the reasonable cost. To obtaininformation about reimbursement call1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00300( ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem

*[HS00400( ALL)01/95] Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford andLincoln-Mercury dealerships that can serviceyour vehicle for you. This chapter tells you howto get service or maintenance for your vehicle.


215

%*[HS00500( ALL)03/95] Service/Maintenance Concerns(U.S. or Canada)

*[HS00600( ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to yourselling dealer who wants to ensure yourcontinued satisfaction. You may, however, takeyour vehicle to any authorized Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, yourdealer will be able to resolve your concern.

*[HS00700( ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service youreceived from your dealership’s servicedepartment, talk to the service manager at thedealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk tothe owner or general manager of the dealership.In most cases, you will have your concernresolved at this level.

*[HS01000( ALL)03/95] If you are away from home when your vehicleneeds to be serviced, or if you need more helpthan the dealer gave you, contact the FordCustomer Assistance Center to find anauthorized dealership that may be able to help.


216

*[HS01025( ALL)04/95] In the U.S., contact:

%*[HS01050( ALL)03/95]

one inch art:0060100-E

*[HS01100( ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

%*[HS01150( ALL)04/95]


*[HS01200( ALL)04/95] Please have the following information availablewhen contacting Ford Customer Assistance:

*[HS01300( ALL)04/95] ❑your telephone number (both business andhome)

*[HS01400( ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where thedealership is located

*[HS01500( ALL)04/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS01550( ALL)04/95] ❑ the date purchased

*[HS01600( ALL)03/95] ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle

%*[HS01700( ALL)03/95] ❑your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)listed on your owner card and/or yourvehicle ownership license


217

[HS01800( ALL)05/95]


Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number)

*[HS02200( ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint,you may wish to contact the Dispute SettlementBoard (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada.

%*[HS02300( ALL)02/95] The Dispute Settlement Board(U.S. Only)

*[HS02400( ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary,independent dispute-settlement programavailable free to owners or lessees of qualifyingFord Motor Company vehicles.

*[HS02500( ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not beavailable in all states. Ford Motor Companyreserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations, modify procedures and/or todiscontinue this process at any time withoutnotice and without incurring obligations.

*[HS02600( ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the BoardReview?

*[HS02700( ALL)03/95] The Board reviews all product performance andservice complaints on Ford, Mercury and LincolnCars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucks underwarranty that have not been resolved by adealer or Ford Motor Company.

*[HS02750( ALL)03/95] The Board does not review issues involving:

*[HS02800( ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford product

*[HS02900( ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford dealership


218

*[HS03100( ALL)01/95] ❑A vehicle sales transaction

*[HS03200( ALL)01/95] ❑A request for reimbursement of consequentialexpenses unless incidental to a service orproduct complaint being reviewed

*[HS03300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Items not covered by your warranty

*[HS03400( ALL)01/95] ❑Alleged liability claims

*[HS03450( ALL)01/95] ❑Property damage where such damage issignificant when compared to the economicloss alleged under the warranty dispute

*[HS03500( ALL)01/95] ❑Cases currently in litigation

*[HS03600( ALL)01/95] ❑Vehicles not used primarily for personal,family, or household purposes

*[HS03650( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles onwhich applicable express written newvehicle warranties have expired atreceipt of your application are noteligible. Eligibility may differaccording to state law. For example, seethe unique brochure for Californiapurchasers/lessees.

*[HS03700( ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work?

*[HS03800( ALL)04/95] The Board has four members:

*[HS03900( ALL)04/95] ❑ three consumer representatives

*[HS04000( ALL)04/95] ❑a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer

*[HS04200( ALL)04/95] Consumer candidates for Board membership arerecruited and trained by an independentconsulting firm. Dealers are chosen because oftheir business leadership qualities.

*[HS04300( ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warrantystart date), you have a right to make an oralpresentation before the Board by indicating yourchoice on the application. Also, oral


219

presentations may be requested by the Board. Adecision is made by the Board by simplemajority vote.

[HS04320( ALL)06/93] Board members review all the materials relatedto each complaint and, based on the availableinformation, arrive at a fair and impartialdecision. Decisions are based on the writtenstatements and any oral presentations made byeach of the involved parties.

*[HS04400( ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once amonth, some cases will take longer than 30 daysto be reviewed. The Board will make everyeffort to resolve each case within 40 days after itreceives the customer application form.

*[HS04500( ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Boardwill mail you its decision in writing. It will alsoprovide you with a form to indicate youracceptance or rejection of an award decision. Thedecisions of the Board are binding on the dealerand Ford, but customers may have other optionsavailable to them under state or federal law.

*[HS04600( ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may beintroduced into evidence by any party insubsequent legal proceedings that may beinitiated.

*[HS04700( ALL)01/95] How Do You Contact the Board?

*[HS04800( ALL)04/95] Write to the Board at the following address torequest a brochure/application. You will be senta brochure and a one-page customer applicationform. The form should be completed and mailedto the same address.


220

*[HS04900( ALL)02/93]


*[HS05100( ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process?

*[HS05200( ALL)04/95] Your application will be reviewed and if it isdetermined to be eligible, you will receive anacknowledgment indicating the file numberassigned to your application and the local Boardaddress. At the same time, your dealer and FordMotor Company representative are asked tosubmit statements.

*[HS05300( ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needsthe following information:

*[HS05400( ALL)04/95] ❑ legible copies of all documents andmaintenance or repair orders that relate tothe case

*[HS05500( ALL)04/95] ❑ the year, make, model, and vehicleidentification number

*[HS05600( ALL)04/95] ❑ the date you bought your vehicle

*[HS05700( ALL)04/95] ❑ the date of repair and the mileage at the timeof repair

*[HS05800( ALL)04/95] ❑ the current mileage

*[HS05900( ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer who sold you thevehicle or who serviced your vehicle

*[HS06000( ALL)04/95] ❑a brief description of your unresolvedcomplaint

*[HS06100( ALL)05/95] ❑a brief summary of actions that were takenwith the dealer and Ford Motor Company


221

*[HS06200( ALL)05/95] ❑ the names (if known) of all people youcontacted at the dealership

*[HS06300( ALL)04/95] ❑a description of the action you want done toresolve your concern.

*[HS06305( ALL)04/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review,an explanation will be mailed to you.

%*[HS07400( ALL)04/95] Reporting Safety Defects(U.S. Only)

*[HS07500( ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford MotorCompany.

*[HS07600( ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or FordMotor Company.

*[HS07700( ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the AutoSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or writeto: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. Youcan also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.


222

%*[HS08700( ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada CustomerAssistance

*[HS08800( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

*[HS08900( ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

*[HS09000( ALL)03/95]


%*[HS09100( ALL)03/95] Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP)

*[HS09200( ALL)03/95] If a specific item of concern arises, where asolution cannot be reached between a vehicleowner, Ford of Canada, and/or one of itsdealers (that all parties can agree upon), theowner may wish to use the services offered bythe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP).

[HS09300( ALL)05/95] CAMVAP uses the services of ProvincialAdministrators to assist consumers in schedulingand preparing for their arbitration hearings.However, before you can proceed withCAMVAP you must follow your manufacturer’sdispute resolution process as outlined under“Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. orCanada)” earlier in this chapter.


223

*[HS09400( ALL)05/95] Consumers wishing to obtain further informationabout the program can obtain an informationbooklet from your dealer or contact theProvincial Administrator, Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan, at the address ortelephone number shown below.

*[HS09500( ALL)05/95] O & P Services595 Bay Street — Suite 300Toronto, OntarioM5G 2C2Telephone 1 (800) 207-0685

[HS09600( ALL)05/95] This plan is not available in the province ofQuebec.

%*[HS09700( ALL)05/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S.and Canada

*[HS09800( ALL)05/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreigncountry, contact the appropriate foreign embassyor consulate to make sure local regulations donot prevent you from registering your vehicle.Officials at the embassy can also help you decidewhether you should import your vehicle to thatcountry.

*[HS09900( ALL)05/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell youwhere to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot getunleaded fuel or can get only fuel with ananti-knock index that is lower than your vehicleneeds, contact a district or owner relations officebefore you leave the U.S. or Canada.

*[HS10000( ALL)05/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without aproper conversion may damage the effectivenessof your emissions control system and may causeengine knocking or serious engine damage. FordMotor Company is not responsible for anydamage that is caused by use of improper fuel.


224

*[HS10100( ALL)05/95] You may also have difficulty importing yourvehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.

*[HS10200( ALL)05/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you aretraveling or living in Central or South America,the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, write to:

*[HS10300( ALL)05/95]

one inch art:0060103-H

*[HS10400( ALL)05/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, they can direct you to the appropriateFord affiliate office.

*[HS10500( ALL)05/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America andthen relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada,register your Vehicle Identification Number andnew address with Ford Motor Company ExportOperations.


225

Accessories

*[AC00200( ALL)03/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle

*[AC00240( ALL)04/95] Ford has many fine products available fromyour dealer to clean your vehicle and protect itsfinishes. For best results, use the following, orproducts of equivalent quality:

*[AC00280( ALL)04/95]

fourteen pica chart:0001204-B

*[AC00300( ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is availablethrough your local authorized dealer. These fineaccessories have been engineered specifically tofulfill your automotive needs. They are customdesigned to complement the style andaerodynamic appearance of your Ford-builtvehicle. In addition, each accessory is made fromhigh quality materials and meets or exceedsFord’s rigid engineering and safety specifications.That is why Ford brand accessories arewarranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See yourdealer for complete warranty information andaccessory availability.

File:rcacg.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 08:03:11 1996

226

*[AC00350( ALL)03/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience

[AC00460( GV)05/94]

fourteen pica chart:0010544-M

[AC00560( GV)03/95]

ten pica chart:0010545-N

*[AC01400( ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment,passengers, and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weightcapacity of the vehicle or of the frontor rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shownon the Safety Compliance CertificationLabel). Consult your dealer for specificweight information.


227

[AC01500( ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) or in Canada theCanadian Radio TelecommunicationsCommission (CRTC) regulates the useof mobile communications systems —such as two-way radios, telephones,and theft alarms — that are equippedwith radio transmitters. Any suchequipment installed in your vehicleshould comply with FCC regulationand should be installed only by aqualified technician.

*[AC01600( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems mayharm the operation of your vehicle,particularly if they are not properlydesigned for automotive use or are notproperly installed. For example, whenoperated, such systems may cause theengine to stumble or stall. In addition,such systems may themselves bedamaged or their operation affected byoperating your vehicle. (Citizens band[CB] transceivers, garage door openers,and other transmitters whose poweroutput is 5 watts or less will notordinarily affect your vehicle’soperation.)

*[AC01700( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over theinstallation, design, or manufacture ofsuch systems, Ford cannot assumeresponsibility for any adverse effects ordamage that may result if you use thisequipment.


228

% [AC02700( G )12/94]

thirty-six pica chart:0011329-A


229

[AC02800( G )12/94]



230

[AC02900( G )12/94]



231

[AC03300( CG )12/94]



233

Servicing Your GrandMarquis

%*[SV00300( ALL)03/95] Service Made Easy

*[SV00400( ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.

*[SV00550( ALL)01/95] 1. When we can, we design parts that do notneed to be serviced.

*[SV00600( ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle aseasy as possible. To help you:

*[SV00700( ALL)01/95] ❑We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow inthe engine compartment so that you can findthem easily.

*[SV00800( ALL)01/95] ❑When possible, we design parts — such asthe headlamp bulbs — that can be replacedwithout tools.

*[SV00900( ALL)05/94] ❑We give you a Maintenance Schedule thatmakes tracking routine service for yourvehicle easy. The maintenance schedule islocated in the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet.

*[SV01000( ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts thatyou need to check and service regularly.

*[SV01100( ALL)02/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, yourdealership can provide the parts and servicerequired. Check your Warranty Information Bookletto find out which parts and services are covered.Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of thisOwner Guide.

File:rcsvg.exUpdate:Wed Jun 28 16:19:38 1995

234

*[SV01250( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that theOwner Maintenance Checks listed in theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet beperformed for the proper operation of yourvehicle. In addition to the conditions listed inthe Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for anyunusual noise, vibration, or other indication thatyour vehicle may need service. If you do noticesomething unusual, see that your vehicle isserviced promptly.

*[SV01275( ALL)03/95] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids,and service parts conforming to Fordspecifications. Motorcraft parts are designed andbuilt to provide the best performance in yourvehicle. Using these parts for replacement isyour assurance that Ford-built quality stays inyour vehicle.

%*[SV01400( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotivefluids in a responsible manner. Followyour community’s standards fordisposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find outabout recycling automotive fluids.

%*[SV01600( ALL)03/95] Precautions When Servicing YourVehicle

*[SV01700( ALL)01/95] Be especially careful when inspecting orservicing your vehicle. Here are some generalprecautions for your safety:

*[SV01900( ALL)03/95] ❑ If you must work with the engine running,avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry thatcould get caught in moving parts. Takeappropriate precautions with long hair.

*[SV02000( ALL)01/95] ❑Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosedspace with the engine running, unless you aresure you have enough ventilation.


235

*[SV02100( ALL)01/95] ❑Never get under a vehicle while it issupported by a jack only. If you must workunder a vehicle, use safety stands.

*[SV02200( ALL)01/95] ❑Keep all lit cigarettes and other smokingmaterials away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

*[SV02800( ALL)03/95] Working with the engine off:

*[SV03000( BCGV)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched inP (Park).

*[SV03100( ALL)03/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after youturn the engine off.

*[SV03150( ALL)03/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.

*[SV03200( ALL)03/95] Working with the engine on:

*[SV03400( BCGV)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched inP (Park).

*[SV03501( ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.

*[SV03600( ALL)02/95] RWARNING

Do not start your engine with the aircleaner removed and do not remove itwhile the engine is running.


236

%*[SV03650( ALL)03/95] Opening the Hood

[SV03800( ALL)03/95] 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood releaselocated under the lower left corner of theinstrument panel.

[SV03850( GV)03/94]


The hood release under the instrument panel

[SV04000( ALL)03/95] 2. Go around to the front of the vehicle, andrelease the auxiliary catch that is locatedunder the front edge of the hood at thecenter of the vehicle.

[SV04050( GV)05/94]


The auxiliary catch under the front edge of the hood

*[SV04200( BCGV)01/95] 3. Lift the hood until the counterbalancedhinges hold it open.


237

*[SV04400( BCGV)01/95] Whenever you close the hood, latch it securely.

*[SV04450( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Apply lubricant to the hood latch atsix-month intervals to maintain smoothand trouble-free operation.

%*[SV04600( ALL)05/95] Engine Compartment

*[SV04800( GV)01/95] Your vehicle has a 4.6 liter engine. The followingpage shows a diagram of where to find itemsthat you should regularly service.


238

[SV05800( GV)05/95]

full page art:0010329-D

A 4.6 liter SFI engine


239

%*[SV05850( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine

*[SV06000( ALL)04/95] A clean engine is more efficient because abuildup of grease and dirt acts as an insulator,keeping the engine warmer than usual.

*[SV06020( ALL)05/95] ❑Extreme care must be used if a power washeris used to clean the engine. The high pressurefluid could penetrate sealed parts andassemblies causing damage or malfunctions.

*[SV06040( ALL)04/95] ❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of theengine block or fuel injection pump, do notspray a hot engine or injection pump withcold water.

*[SV06060( ALL)04/95] ❑The alternator, distributor and air intake mustbe covered. Covering these components willhelp prevent water damage.

*[SV06080( ALL)04/95] ❑Never wash or rinse the engine while it isrunning. Water getting into the engine maycause internal damage.

%*[SV06100( ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank

*[SV06220( GV)01/95] The fuel filler door is outside the vehicle on thedriver’s side near the back. To fill the fuel tank:

[SV06550( ALL)05/95] 1. After opening the fuel filler door, removethe cap carefully and slowly by turning itcounterclockwise 1/2 to 3/4 turn.

[SV06650( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The fuel system may be under pressure. Ifthe fuel cap is venting vapor or if youhear a hissing sound while disengagingthe fuel cap, wait until it stops beforecompletely removing the cap. Otherwise,fuel may spray out and injure you orothers.


240

[SV06700( ALL)05/95] 2. Put the nozzle all the way inside the fuelfiller pipe before pumping the fuel.

[SV06800( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you spill any fuel on the body ofyour vehicle, clean it off immediately.The fuel may dull or soften the paintif you do not wash it off.

[SV06850( ALL)05/95] 3. Replace the fuel cap completely when youare finished. Turn it clockwise 1/4 turn untilit is tight. It will click when it is fullytightened.

[SV06875( ALL)05/95] 4. Push the fuel door closed.


If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with aMotorcraft or equivalent fuel cap. If youdo not use the proper fuel cap, thepressure in the fuel tank can damage thefuel system or cause it to work improperlyin a collision, endangering you and yourpassengers.

[SV06950( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with anaftermarket fuel filler cap, the customerwarranty may be void for any damageto the fuel tank and/or fuel system.

[SV07500( ALL)05/95] Choosing the Right Fuel

[SV07600( ALL)05/95] Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle.Using leaded fuel is prohibited by federal law.Your warranty may not apply if your vehicle isdamaged because you used the wrong fuel.

[SV07701( ALL)05/95] Using a high-quality fuel makes your vehiclemore responsive and maintain its good fueleconomy and emissions. It should not benecessary to add any aftermarket products toyour fuel tank if you continue to use ahigh-quality fuel.


241

[SV08750( ALL)05/95] Octane recommendations

[SV08800( ALL)05/95] Your engine is designed to use fuel with anoctane rating of 87. In most cases it is notnecessary to use a fuel with an octane ratinghigher than 87. At service stations, the octanerating is displayed in a label on the pumps.

[SV08900( ALL)05/95]


[SV09100( ALL)05/95] Using a fuel with a lower octane rating cancause persistent and heavy knocking, which candamage the engine.

[SV09200( ALL)05/95] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimesknocks lightly when you drive up a hill or whenyou accelerate. However, see your dealer or aqualified service technician if persistent heavyknocking occurs because this can damage theengine.

[SV09350( ALL)05/95] If your vehicle has problems with starting, roughidle or hesitation problems when the engine iscold, it may be caused by fuel with lowvolatility. Try a different brand of fuel. If thecondition persists, see your dealer or a qualifiedservice technician.

[SV09800( ALL)05/95] Gasolines for clean air[SV09900( ALL)05/95] Fuels in certain areas of the country are required

to contain oxygenates to improve air quality.Common oxygenates are ethanol or grain alcohol(blended at no more than 10%), methanol orwood alcohol (blended at no more than 5% withcosolvents and additives), and MTBE or methyltertiary butyl ether (blended at no more than15%).


242

[SV09950( ALL)05/95] Reformulated gasoline is also required in certainareas of the U.S. These fuels are designed tofurther reduce emissions from your vehicle.

[SV10000( ALL)05/95] Generally, you should not experience difficultiesoperating your vehicle on fuels containingoxygenates. We encourage you to use thesefuels.

[SV10185( ALL)05/95] Safety Information Relating to AutomotiveFuels


Automotive fuels can cause serious injuryor death if misused or mishandled. Tominimize the risk that you will beinjured, please read the followinginformation carefully and observe therecommended precautions.

[SV10197( ALL)05/95] ❑Turn vehicle off when refueling

[SV10199( ALL)05/95] ❑Do not smoke when refueling. Fuels areextremely flammable.

[SV10201( ALL)05/95] ❑Do not siphon any fuel by mouth.


Gasoline or gasoline blended withmethanol can cause blindness andpossible death when swallowed. If anyfuel is swallowed, call a physician orpoison control center immediately.

[SV10209( ALL)05/95] ❑Avoid breathing vapors while refueling.

[SV10211( ALL)05/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash withsoap and water.

[SV10225( ALL)05/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contactlenses (if worn), flush with water for 15minutes, and seek medical attention.


243

[SV10227( ALL)05/95] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain smallamounts of carcinogens, such as benzene.Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vaporshas caused cancer in laboratory animals.

[SV10230( ALL)05/95] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” orother forms of disulfiram for the treatment ofalcoholism, vapor or skin contact with agasoline-methanol blend may cause the samekind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholicbeverage. In sensitive individuals, seriouspersonal injury or sickness could result. Consulta physician promptly if you experience anadverse reaction.

[SV11300( ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel

[SV11350( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because thissituation may have an adverse effect onmodern powertrain components.

[SV11500( ALL)05/95] You may need to crank the engine several timesbefore the fuel system starts to pump fuel fromthe tank to the engine.

[SV11600( ALL)05/95] Calculating Fuel Economy[SV11700( ALL)05/95] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of

your vehicle, and can be calculated as Miles PerGallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers(L/100K).

[SV11750( ALL)05/95] Do not calculate fuel economy during yourvehicle’s break-in period. This would not be anaccurate estimate of how much fuel your vehiclewill normally use.

[SV11800( ALL)05/95] To calculate fuel economy:

[SV11900( ALL)05/95] 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record theinitial odometer reading.

[SV12000( ALL)05/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel, record theamount (in gallons or liters) purchased.


244

[SV12100( ALL)05/95] 3. After at least 3-5 tankfuls, fill the fuel tankand record the final odometer reading.

[SV12200( ALL)05/95] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fueleconomy:

[SV12250( ALL)05/95] ❑English: MPG = (total miles driven) V(gallons used)

[SV12275( ALL)05/95] ❑Metric: L/100k = (liters used) V(100 kilometers)

[SV12300( ALL)05/95] Comparisons With EPA Estimates

[SV12400( ALL)05/95] EPA fuel economy figures are obtained fromlaboratory tests under simulated road conditionsand may not reflect the actual conditions youexperience or your style of driving. The EPAfuel economy estimate is not a guarantee thatyou will achieve the fuel economy shown.

[SV12650( ALL)05/95] The following decrease fuel economy:

[SV12700( ALL)05/95] ❑Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance

[SV12800( ALL)05/95] ❑Rapid acceleration and excessive speed

[SV12850( ALL)05/95] ❑Driving with your foot on the brake

[SV12900( ALL)05/95] ❑Sudden stops

[SV12950( ALL)05/95] ❑Extended engine idling

[SV13000( ALL)05/95] ❑Using speed control in hilly terrain

[SV13100( ALL)05/95] ❑Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rearwindow defroster and other accessories

[SV13200( ALL)05/95] ❑Underinflated tires

[SV13300( ALL)05/95] ❑Heavy loads

[SV13400( ALL)05/95] ❑Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski orluggage racks, bug deflectors, etc.


245

*[SV13510( ALL)02/95] Self-Service Pointers

*[SV13520( ALL)01/95] If you choose to do your own fueling, youshould also perform a few simple maintenanceroutines. This extra effort will save youadditional money and contribute to the drivingefficiency of your vehicle.

*[SV13530( ALL)01/95] The following procedures require only a tiregauge, a rag, an oil can spout and windshieldwasher fluid.

*[SV13540( ALL)01/95] ❑Check the engine oil at every refueling stop

*[SV13550( ALL)01/95] ❑Clean the windshield, outside mirrors andheadlights

*[SV13560( ALL)01/95] ❑Check windshield washer fluid

*[SV13570( ALL)02/95] ❑Check tires for excessive wear or worn edges

*[SV13580( ALL)01/95] ❑Check the tire pressure at least monthly

%*[SV13600( ALL)03/95] Engine Oil Recommendations

*[SV13610( ALL)04/95] We recommend using Motorcraft oil or anequivalent oil meeting Ford SpecificationESE-M2C153-E and displaying the AmericanPetroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK onthe front of the container.

*[SV13650( ALL)03/95]


The API Certification Mark


246

*[SV13670( ALL)01/95] Never use:

*[SV13680( ALL)01/95] ❑“Non-Detergent” oils

*[SV13690( ALL)04/95] ❑Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG

%*[SV13700( ALL)01/95] ❑Additional engine oil additives, oil treatmentsor engine treatments

%*[SV13702( ALL)03/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity arePREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide thebest engine performance, fuel economy andengine protection for all climates down to -15˚F(-25˚C).

%*[SV13703( ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED andof the preferred viscosity may be used in yourengine. The engine oil and oil filter must still bechanged according to the maintenance schedule.

%*[SV13775( ALL)01/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil

*[SV13800( ALL)03/95] Since the proper amount of engine oil isimportant for safe engine operation, check the oilusing the dipstick each time you put fuel inyour vehicle. Remember the engine must be off,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beparked on level ground.

%*[SV13900( ALL)04/95] Checking the engine oil level:

*[SV14000( ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed upand allow a few minutes for the engine oilto drain back into the oil pan.

*[SV14025( BCGV)03/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure thegearshift is securely latched in P (Park).

*[SV14100( ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engineheat.

*[SV14200( ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted inyellow) and carefully pull it out of theengine.


247

*[SV14300( ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back intoposition, making sure it is fully seated.

[SV14400( GV)08/93]


Engine oil dipstick

*[SV14500( ALL)03/95] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If theoil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line, addengine oil as necessary. If the oil level isbeyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damageor high oil consumption may occur andsome oil must be removed from the engine.

*[SV14600( ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it isfully seated.

*[SV14800( ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oilchanges. Make sure you use a CERTIFIEDengine oil of the preferred viscosity. Yourvehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply ifengine damage is caused by the use of improperengine oil.

*[SV15000( ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler caphighlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove thefiller cap and use a funnel to pour oil into theopening. Be careful not to overfill the engine.Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil.


248

%*[SV16300( ALL)01/95] Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter

*[SV16400( ALL)04/95] Change the engine oil and oil filter per thefollowing, whichever occurs first.

*[SV16500( ALL)04/95]


*[SV16800( ALL)04/95] Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet for additional information.



Continuous contact with USED motor oilhas caused cancer in laboratory mice.

*[SV17285( ALL)05/95] Protect your skin by washing with soap andwater.


249

%*[SV17300( ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant%*[SV17400( ALL)03/95] Checking the Engine Coolant

*[SV17500( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandPrecautions When Servicing YourVehicle at the beginning of this chapter.

*[SV17600( BCGV)05/95] RWARNING

The cooling fan is automatic and maycome on at any time. Always disconnectthe negative terminal of the battery beforeworking near the fan.

%*[SV17800( ALL)05/94] Your vehicle’s coolant protects your engine fromoverheating in the summer and from freezing inthe winter. Check the level of the coolant at leastonce a month. Simply look at the engine coolantreservoir located in the engine compartment. Tolocate the reservoir, see the diagram of yourvehicle’s engine under Engine Type, in thischapter.

*[SV17850( ALL)05/95] The coolant additives also protect the entirecooling system from internal passagewaycorrosion and these additives lubricate the waterpump. The coolant should be serviced as notedin the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.


250

[SV18000( BCGV)05/94]


The engine coolant recovery reservoir

%*[SV18600( ALL)11/94] Checking hoses

*[SV18700( ALL)11/94] Inspect all engine and heater system hoses andhose connections for deterioration, leaks, andloose hose clamps as specified in the MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet. Repair or replacewith Motorcraft hoses or equivalent as necessary.

*[SV18800( ALL)01/95] Adding engine coolant


Do not put engine coolant in the containerfor the windshield washer fluid.

*[SV18950( ALL)05/95] If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant orantifreeze could make it difficult to see throughthe windshield.


251

[SV19010( GV)05/95] RWARNING

Never remove the pressure cap while theengine is running or hot.

[SV19030( ALL)05/95] Follow these steps to avoid personal injury thatcan be caused by escaping steam or enginecoolant.

*[SV19060( GV)01/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engineoff and let it cool. Even when the engine iscool, be careful when you remove thepressure cap.

[SV19145( ALL)03/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick towelaround the cap and turn it slowlycounterclockwise to unscrew.

*[SV19150( ALL)03/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.

[SV19160( ALL)12/94] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure hasbeen released, use the cloth to press the capdown, turn it, and remove it.

*[SV19175( GV)02/95] 5. Stand away from the reservoir opening. Hotsteam may blow out or hot engine coolantmay even splash out.

*[SV19190( ALL)03/95] To find out how much engine coolant mixtureyour vehicle’s coolant system can hold, see Refillcapacities for fluids in the Index.

% [SV19200( ALL)12/94] Add engine coolant only to the recoveryreservoir. If the coolant level is low, add a 50/50or appropriate mixture of water and the type ofengine coolant that Ford specifies. You may addwater by itself only in an emergency, but youshould replace it with a 50/50 or appropriatemixture as soon as possible.

*[SV19300( ALL)01/95] Have your dealer check the engine coolingsystem for leaks if you have to add more than aquart (liter) of engine coolant more than once amonth.


252

*[SV19350( ALL)02/95] Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is anoptimized formula that will protect all metalsand rubber elastomers used in Ford engines forfour years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is notnecessary and not recommended to usesupplemental coolant additives in your gasolinepowered vehicle. These additives may harmyour engine cooling system. Follow therecommended service interval for changing yourengine coolant.

*[SV19450( ALL)04/94] NOTE: When you change or add enginecoolant, it is important to maintainyour engine coolant concentrationbetween 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60%(-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your localclimate conditions. Below 40% you willlose freeze protection and above 60%your engine may overheat on a warmday.

[SV19460( ALL)12/94] NOTE: The use of an improper coolant mayvoid your warranty for the enginecooling system. Use only a premiumnationally recognized brand nameengine coolant. Do not use alcohol,methanol antifreeze or engine coolantmixed with alcohol or methanolantifreeze. If you do not use the propercoolant, the aluminum radiator on yourvehicle will corrode.

*[SV19470( ALL)05/95] Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes theFord Rotunda engine coolant recycling processand chemicals. Use only Ford Rotunda recycledengine coolant or an equivalent recycled enginecoolant that is certified by the supplier to meetFord specification ESE-M97B44-A.


253


*[SV19500( ALL)03/95] Use Ford Premium Cooling System FluidE2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B)or an equivalent engine coolant that meets FordSpecification ESE-M97B44-A.

*[SV19550( ALL)01/95] Leave the engine coolant in all year. Make surethat the coolant will not freeze at thetemperature level in which you drive duringwinter months. Keep a mixture of engine coolantin your engine that has a protection rating of atleast -34˚F (-37˚C), or whatever protection ratingis appropriate for the climate in which you live.

%*[SV20100( ALL)04/95] Engine coolant drain and flush

*[SV20200( ALL)11/94] Proper procedures for a complete coolant drainand flush of the cooling system can be found inthe Car Service Manual. Following theserecommended procedures will ensure that thespecified coolant level and a 50/50 orappropriate mixture of coolant and water ismaintained.

%*[SV20300( ALL)02/95] Engine coolant refill procedure

*[SV20400( ALL)01/95] When the entire cooling system is drained andrefilled, the following procedure should be usedto ensure a complete fill:

*[SV20450( ALL)05/95] NOTE: It is imperative the followingprocedure be adhered to. Failure to doso could result in damage to yourengine.


254

*[SV22014( ALL)03/95] ❑With the engine OFF and cool, remove thepressure cap, located on the coolant reservoir.Remove the heater hose and clamp, locatedon the rear of the intake manifold.

*[SV22021( ALL)03/95] ❑Add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant andwater to the coolant reservoir. Refer to RefillCapacities later in this chapter for the correctamount. Add coolant to the reservoir untilthe coolant continuously flows out of the tubein the rear of engine. Reattach hose andsecure clamp.

[SV22026( ALL)03/95] ❑Continue to fill the reservoir until the coolantis at the FULL COLD level.

*[SV22031( ALL)05/95] ❑Reinstall the pressure cap to the fullyinstalled position.

*[SV22036( ALL)05/95] ❑Start and idle the engine until the radiatorupper hose is warm (this indicates thethermostat is open and coolant is flowingthrough the entire system).

*[SV22041( ALL)03/95] ❑ Immediately shut off the engine and let cool.Cautiously remove the pressure relief cap andadd a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant andwater until the coolant is at the COLD FILLlevel in the coolant reservoir.

*[SV22046( ALL)03/95] ❑Reinstall the pressure cap securely.

*[SV22050( ALL)03/95] ❑Check for leaks at the draincock.

*[SV22055( ALL)03/95] ❑Recheck the engine coolant level, using therecommended procedure, after one or twooccasions of vehicle use.


255

%*[SV22090( ALL)03/95] Battery

*[SV22100( ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have a Motorcraftmaintenance-free battery. When the originalequipment battery is replaced under warranty, itmay be replaced by a MotorcraftLow-Maintenance Battery.

*[SV22130( ALL)02/95] The Low-Maintenance Battery has removablevent caps for checking the electrolyte level andfor adding water, if necessary. The electrolytelevel should be checked at least every 24 monthsor 24,000 miles (40 000 km) in temperatures upto 90˚F (32˚C) and more often in temperaturesabove 90˚F (32˚C). Keep the electrolyte level ineach cell up to the level indicator. Do notoverfill.

*[SV22145( ALL)02/95] If the level gets low, you can add tap water tothe battery, provided the water isn’t hard ordoesn’t have a high mineral or alkali content.However, if possible you should refill the batterywith distilled water. If the battery needs waterquite often, have the charging system checkedfor a possible malfunction.

%*[SV22160( ALL)03/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment

*[SV22175( ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company strongly recommends thatused lead-acid batteries be returned to anauthorized recycling facility for disposal.

*[SV22190( ALL)03/95]


Battery recycling symbol


256

%*[SV22194( BCGV)03/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronicallycontrolled by a computer, some controlconditions are maintained by power from thebattery. If you ever disconnect the battery orinstall a new battery, you must allow thecomputer to “relearn” its idle conditions beforeyour vehicle will drive properly. To let theengine do this, put the gearshift in P (Park), turnoff all the accessories, and start the vehicle. Letthe engine idle for at least one minute. (Enginemust be warm in order to “learn.”) Also, allowapproximately 10 miles (16 km) of stop and gotraffic for your vehicle’s engine to completely“relearn” its idle.

%*[SV22200( ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid andWipers

%*[SV22250( ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid

[SV22300( ALL)12/94] Check the level of the windshield washer fluidperiodically, or when the optional lamp indicateslow fluid. The reservoir for washer fluid islocated on the driver’s side of the enginecompartment. Visual inspection can determine ifthe washer fluid is adequate. Do not operate thewasher when the reservoir is empty.


257

[SV23150( GV)03/93]


The reservoir for the windshield washer fluid


Do not put windshield washer fluid in thecontainer for the engine coolant.

%*[SV23500( ALL)01/95] Use specially formulated windshield washerfluid rather than plain water, because speciallyformulated washer fluids contain additives thatdissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washerfluids containing an appropriate antifreeze suchas methanol should be used in freezing weather(temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or localregulations on Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most commonantifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containingnon-methanol antifreeze agents should be usedonly if they provide cold weather protectionwithout damaging the vehicle’s paint finish,wiper blades, and windshield washer system.


258

%*[SV23600( ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades

*[SV23700( ALL)03/95] Check the windshield wiper blades at least twicea year. Also check them whenever they seemless effective than usual. Substances such as treesap and some hot wax treatments used bycommercial car washes reduce the effectivenessof wiper blades.

*[SV23800( ALL)03/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean boththe windshield and the wiper blades. Useundiluted windshield washer solution or a milddetergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Donot use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents to clean your wiper blades. These willdamage your blades.

*[SV23900( ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simplyturn the ignition to the ACC position and turnyour wipers on. Wait for them to reach avertical position and turn the ignition to the OFFposition. Do not move the wipers manually.Manually moving the wipers across thewindshield may damage them.

*[SV24000( ALL)03/01] Wiper blade replacement

*[SV24100( ALL)03/95] If the wiper blades still do not work properlyafter you clean them, you may need to replacethe wiper blade assembly or the blade element.When replacing the wiper blade assembly, bladerefill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft partor equivalent. To replace the blades, follow theinstructions that come with them.


259

%*[SV24200( ALL)03/95] Tires

*[SV24300( ALL)03/95] Look at your tires each time you fill your fueltank. If one tire looks lower than the others,check the pressure in all of them. Always followthese precautions:

*[SV24500( ALL)03/95] ❑Keep your tires inflated to the recommendedpressures.

*[SV24600( ALL)02/95] ❑Stay within the recommended load limits (seeLoad limits in the Index).

*[SV24700( ALL)02/95] ❑Make sure the weight of your load is evenlydistributed.

*[SV24800( ALL)10/89] ❑Drive at safe speeds.

*[SV24900( ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your tiresmay fail or go flat.

*[SV24950( ALL)05/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeyingposted speed limits.


Driving too fast for conditions creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.Driving at very high speeds for extendedperiods of time may result in damage tovehicle components.


260

%*[SV25200( ALL)05/95] At least once a month, check the pressure in allyour vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use anaccurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tirepressure when tires are cold, after the vehiclehas been parked for at least one hour or hasbeen driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You canfind proper cold pressure and load limits ofrecommended size tires on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label.


Improperly inflated tires can affect vehiclehandling and can fail suddenly, possiblyresulting in loss of vehicle control.

%*[SV25500( ALL)02/95] Tire Rotation

*[SV25600( ALL)04/95] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tiresperform different jobs, they often weardifferently. To make sure your tires wear evenlyand last longer, rotate them as indicated in thefollowing diagram.

*[SV25700( ALL)01/95] For tire rotation intervals, see the MaintenanceSchedule. If you notice that the tires wearunevenly, have them checked.


261

[SV26200( GV)05/89]

two third page art:0010381-B

Rotating the tires

[SV26350( GV)03/94] NOTE: Use the five tire rotation only whenthe conventional spare wheel is thesame as the road wheels. (Do not mixthe steel wheel with aluminum wheelsin tire rotation sequence.)


262

%*[SV26500( ALL)04/95] Replacing the Tires

*[SV26600( ALL)01/95] Replace any tires that show wear bands. Whenyour tire shows a wear band, it has only1/16 inch (2 mm) of tread left.

% [SV26700( ALL)05/94]


A worn-out tire

*[SV26800( ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly,you may need to replace them before a wearband appears across the entire tread. Some spotswear more heavily than others.


When replacing full size tires, never mixradial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Useonly the tire sizes that are listed on thetire pressure decal. Make sure that all tiresare the same size, speed rating, andload-carrying capacity. Use only the tirecombinations recommended on the decal.If you do not follow these precautions,your vehicle may not drive properly andsafely.

*[SV27100( ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than yourvehicle’s original tires may also affect theaccuracy of your speedometer.


263

%*[SV28100( ALL)02/95] Information About Tire Quality Grades

*[SV28200( ALL)01/95] New vehicles are fitted with tires that have theirTire Quality Grade (described below) moldedinto the tire’s sidewall. These Tire QualityGrades are determined by standards that theUnited States Department of Transportation hasset.

*[SV28250( ALL)01/95] Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatictires for use on passenger cars. They do notapply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tireswith nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches orlimited production tires as defined in Title 49Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).

*[SV28300( ALL)01/95] U.S. Department of Transportation — Tirequality grades: The U.S. Department ofTransportation requires Ford to give you thefollowing information about tire grades exactlyas the government has written it.

%*[SV28399( ALL)01/95] Treadwear

*[SV28400( ALL)01/95] The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)times as well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in road characteristicsand climate.


264

*[SV28499( ALL)01/95] Traction A B C

*[SV28500( ALL)01/95] The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areA, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction performance.Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on braking (straightahead) traction testsand does not include cornering (turning)traction.

*[SV28599( ALL)01/95] Temperature A B C

*[SV28600( ALL)01/95] The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds toa level of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: The temperaturegrade for this tire is established for a tire that isproperly inflated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.


265

%*[SV28700( ALL)04/95] Snow Tires and Chains

*[SV28800( BCGV)01/95] The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treadsthat provide traction in rain or snow. However,during the winter months in some climates, youmay need to use snow tires and occasionallychains for your tires.


Snow tires must be the same size andgrade as the tires you currently have onyour vehicle.

*[SV29000( ALL)02/95] Use chains on the tires only in an emergency orif the law requires them where you live. If youchoose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, beaware of the following:

*[SV29100( ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure the chains are the right size foryour tires. Use only SAE Class “S” chains.Other types may damage your vehicle.

*[SV29200( ALL)01/95] ❑Put the chains on tightly with the ends helddown securely. Verify that no chain touchesany wiring, brake lines, or fuel lines. Followthe chain manufacturer’s instructions.

*[SV29300( ALL)01/95] ❑Drive slowly. If you can hear the chains rubor bang against your vehicle, stop the vehicleand tighten the chains. If you continue tohear the chains rub or bang against yourvehicle, remove the chains to prevent damageto your vehicle.

*[SV29400( ALL)10/94] ❑Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible.

*[SV29500( ALL)05/94] ❑Remove tire chains at the first opportunityafter using them on snow and ice. Do not usethe chains on dry roads.


266

%*[SV29600( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels

*[SV29700( ALL)05/95] Wash the wheels with the same detergent youuse to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not useacid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives,fuel, or strong detergents. These substances willdamage protective coatings. Use tar and road oilremover to remove grease and tar.

*[SV29800( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out ifthe brushes are abrasive.

%*[SV30450( ALL)01/95] Automatic Transmission Fluid

*[SV30475( ALL)01/95] Under normal circumstances, you do not need tocheck the fluid level of the transmission, sinceyour vehicle does not use up transmission fluid.Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet for replacement intervals. However, ifthe transmission is not working properly — forinstance, the transmission may slip or shiftslowly, or you may notice some sign of fluidleakage — the fluid level should be checked.

%*[SV30550( ALL)02/95] Checking the Automatic TransmissionFluid

*[SV30560( ALL)02/95] It is preferable to check the transmission fluidlevel at normal operating temperature150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), after approximately20 miles (30 km) of driving. However, ifnecessary, you can check the fluid level withouthaving to drive 20 miles (30 km) to obtain anormal operating temperature if outsidetemperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C).

[SV30575( ALL)03/94] With the vehicle on a level surface, start theengine and, while fully applying the brakepedal, move the transmission shift selectorthrough all of the gear ranges allowing sufficienttime for each position to engage. Securely latchthe transmission shift selector in the P (Park)position, fully set the parking brake and leavethe engine running.


267

[SV30601( GV)03/93] NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven ifthe fluid level is below the bottomhole on the dipstick.

*[SV30650( ALL)02/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap, pull the dipstick outand wipe the indicator end clean. Put thedipstick back into the filler tube and make sureit is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and readthe fluid level.

*[SV30701( GV)01/95] When checking fluid at normal operatingtemperatures 150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), the fluidlevel should be within the crosshatched area onthe dipstick. When the vehicle has not beendriven, and outside temperatures are above 68˚F(20˚C), the fluid levels should be between theholes on the dipstick.

*[SV30715( ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for anextended period at high speeds or incity traffic during hot weather, orpulling a trailer, the vehicle should beturned off for about 30 minutes toallow the fluid to cool before checking.

%*[SV30725(M CGV)05/95] Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid

[SV30750( ALL)03/94] Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correcttype will be used. Use only MERCONH fluid.

*[SV30775( ALL)03/95] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments throughthe filler tube to bring the level to the correctarea on the dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL. If thelevel is above the top hole on the dipstick,excess fluid should be removed by a qualifiedtechnician.



268

[SV30850( GV)10/94]


Detail of the automatic transmission dipstick

%*[SV31900( ALL)03/95] Brake Fluid

*[SV32000( ALL)04/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicleshould not use up brake fluid rapidly. However,expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fallas you put more mileage on your vehicle andthe brake lining wears.

[SV32200( BCGV)03/95] Check the brake fluid at each scheduled engineoil change or at least once a year. You can dothis by looking at the fluid level in the plasticreservoir on the master cylinder. Also, see labelon reservoir cap. (To locate the master cylinder,see The Engine Types in the Index.) The fluidlevel should be between the MIN and MAXmarks.


Brake fluid is toxic.

*[SV32375( ALL)05/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes withrunning water for 15 minutes. Get medicalattention if irritation persists. If taken internally,drink water and induce vomiting. Get medicalattention immediately.


269

*[SV32400( ALL)03/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and removethe cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir tothe MAX line with Ford High PerformanceDOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA,C6AZ-19542-BA, or equivalent DOT 3 fluidmeeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A.


If you use a brake fluid that is notDOT 3, you will cause permanent damageto your brakes.

*[SV33200( ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.

[SV33300( GV)10/90]


The brake fluid reservoir

*[SV33700( ALL)01/95] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low— below the seam or ridge on the outside of theplastic reservoir — have the brake systeminspected.


Do not let the reservoir for the mastercylinder run dry. This may cause thebrakes to fail.


270

%*[SV34800( ALL)03/95] Power Steering Fluid

*[SV34900( ALL)01/95] Check the level of the power steering fluid atleast twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).

%*[SV35000( ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Power SteeringFluid

*[SV35100( ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until thepower steering fluid reaches normaloperating temperature. The power steeringfluid will be at the right temperature whenthe engine coolant temperature gauge in theinstrument cluster is near the center of theNORMAL operating temperature range.

*[SV35200( ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steeringwheel back and forth several times. Makesure that the cap assembly is installed at thistime.

*[SV35300( ALL)05/95] 3. Turn the engine off.

*[SV35420( GV)11/94] 4. Check the fluid level in the power steeringfluid reservoir. The fluid level should bebetween the MIN and MAX lines on the sideof the reservoir.

*[SV35550( GV)11/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is below the MINmark, add fluid in small amounts until thelevel is between the MIN and MAX lines onthe side of the reservoir.

[SV35650( GV)12/94] 6. When you are finished, put the cap assemblyback on the reservoir.


271

[SV35750( GV)12/94]


Fluid level for power steering

[SV35875(M GV)03/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets FordSpecification MerconH ATF XT-2-QDX.

*[SV35900( ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not driveyour vehicle for a long period of time beforeadding fluid. This can damage the powersteering pump.

[SV36150( GV)03/93] If you must check the power steering fluid whenit is cold, make sure that the fluid reaches theMIN mark on the reservoir.

% [SV36280( GV)12/94] Fuses, High Current Fuses, FuseLinks, and Circuit Breakers

*[SV36400( ALL)03/95] Fuses (conventional and high current) and circuitbreakers protect your vehicle’s wiring systemfrom overloading. If electrical parts in yourvehicle are not working, the system may havebeen overloaded and blown a fuse or tripped acircuit breaker. Before you replace or repair any


272

electrical parts, check the appropriate fuses(conventional and high current) or circuitbreakers.

*[SV36600( ALL)03/95] The following charts tell you which fuses orcircuit breakers protect the wiring for eachelectrical part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows ora circuit breaker opens a circuit, all the parts ofyour vehicle that use that circuit will not work.

*[SV36610( ALL)01/95] Once you have determined which fuses or circuitbreakers to check, follow the procedures underChecking and replacing fuses or Checking andreplacing circuit breakers in this chapter.

[SV37400( GV)03/93]


The instrument panel fuse panel


273

%*[SV37500( ALL)02/95] The Instrument Panel Fuses, CircuitBreakers and Relays

[SV38450( G )03/95]



274

[SV38600( G )03/95]



275

%*[SV39000( ALL)01/95] High Current Fuses

*[SV39200( ALL)01/95] High current fuses are circuit protectors that arepart of the wiring harness for some electricalequipment. These, like fuses, open when thecircuit load exceeds their amperage rating. Highcurrent fuses may be purchased from your Fordor Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

[SV39500( GV)06/94] The high current fuse panel is located in theengine compartment near the battery.


Always disconnect the battery beforeservicing high current fuses.

*[SV39700( ALL)05/95] Ford recommends that high current fuses bereplaced by a qualified technician.


276

% [SV40100( ALL)06/93] The high current fuse panel[SV40500( GV)03/94]

full page art:0010700-E


277

[SV40600( ALL)06/93] The high current fuses and relays[SV41200( G )05/95]

twenty-two pica chart:0010690-H

[SV41205( GV)05/95]

sixteen pica chart:0010691-G


278

%*[SV41210( ALL)03/95] Checking and Replacing Fuses

*[SV41215( ALL)02/95] If you need to check a fuse, follow these steps:

[SV41230( GV)03/93] 1. Find the fuse panel to the left of the steeringcolumn. Remove the fuse panel cover toexpose the fuse panel.

[SV41245( BCGV)03/93] 2. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Lookthrough the clear side of the fuse to see ifthe metal wire inside is separated. If it is,the fuse should be replaced.

[SV41550( ALL)05/92]


The side view of a fuse

[SV41600( GV)01/93] 3. Replace the fuse with one that has the rightamperage rating. (See the following charts.)

[SV41900( ALL)05/95]

eight pica chart:0001092-B

[SV41910(M GV)01/94]

six pica chart:0001093-B


279


Always replace a fuse with one that hasthe specified amperage rating. Using afuse with a higher amperage rating cancause severe wire damage and could starta fire.

[SV42700( GV)12/91] 4. Replace the lower steering column finishpanel.

*[SV42800( ALL)01/95] Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue toblow if you do not find what caused theoverload. If the fuse continues to blow, haveyour electrical system checked.

%*[SV42900( ALL)03/95] Circuit Breakers

*[SV43000( ALL)01/95] If you need to check a circuit breaker that is onthe fuse panel, see Checking and replacing fuses inthis chapter to find out how to locate the fusepanel.

[SV43200( ALL)12/94] Circuit breakers will reset themselves and allowthe electrical parts to work again once theoverload on the circuit is removed. If the circuitbreakers continue to cut off electricity, have yourvehicle’s electrical system checked.

*[SV43250( ALL)02/95] Diagnostic equipment is needed to check circuitbreakers. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

*[SV43300( ALL)02/95] If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with thesame amperage rating. To remove a circuitbreaker mounted in the fuse panel, grip it withyour finger and thumb and pull it straight outof its socket.

*[SV43800(M GV)02/95] Since the circuit breaker for the headlamps ismounted in the headlamp switch, you mustreplace the entire switch to install a new circuitbreaker.


280

[SV43900( GV)06/93] Fuse Links

[SV43950( GV)03/93] Fuse links are circuit protectors that are part ofthe wiring harness for some electrical equipment.These, like fuses, open when the circuit leadexceeds their amperage rating. Fuse links may bepurchased from your Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer. See the following charts to find outwhich electrical parts are protected by a fuselink.

[SV43970( GV)03/93]

ten pica chart:0010407-D

%*[SV44400( ALL)03/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement

*[SV44500( ALL)01/95] It is a good idea to check the operation of thefollowing lights frequently:

*[SV44600( ALL)01/95] ❑headlamps

*[SV44700( ALL)01/95] ❑ tail lamps

*[SV44800( ALL)01/95] ❑brakelamps

*[SV44900( ALL)01/95] ❑hazard flasher

*[SV44950( ALL)02/95] ❑high-mount brakelamp

*[SV45000( ALL)01/95] ❑ turn signals

*[SV45100( GV)01/95] ❑ side markers

*[SV45200( ALL)01/95] ❑ license plate lamp


281

%*[SV45600( ALL)01/95] The alignment of your headlamps should bechecked if:

*[SV45700( ALL)01/95] ❑oncoming motorists frequently signal you toturn off your vehicle’s high beams when youdo not have the high beams on

*[SV45800( ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamps do not seem to give youenough light to see clearly at night

*[SV45900( ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamp beams are pointed substantiallyaway from a position slightly down and tothe right

%*[SV46000( ALL)03/95] Headlamp Bulb

*[SV46100( ALL)01/95] The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceablebulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replacethe bulb, rather than the whole lamp.


Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefullyand keep out of children’s reach. Graspthe bulb only by its plastic base and donot touch the glass. The oil from yourhand could cause the bulb to break thenext time the headlamps are operated.

*[SV46300( ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless youcan immediately replace it with a new one. If abulb is removed for an extended period of time,contaminants may enter the headlamp housingand affect its performance.


282

[SV46500( GV)05/95]


Headlamp bulb removal

*[SV46600( ALL)03/95] Removing the headlamp bulb

*[SV46700( ALL)01/95] 1. Make sure that the headlamp switch is inthe OFF position.

*[SV46810( GV)01/95] 2. Lift the hood, open access panel aboveheadlamp and find the bulb in the headlampsocket.

*[SV47000( GV)01/95] 3. Remove the electrical connector by pullingoff the bulb base.

*[SV47150( GV)01/95] 4. Remove the bulb by turning it 1/4 of a turnto free it from the socket.

*[SV47400( ALL)03/95] Installing the headlamp bulb

*[SV47500( GV)01/95] 1. Insert the glass envelope of the bulb into thesocket while aligning the locking tabs.

*[SV47700( GV)01/95] 2. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn to lock.

*[SV47900( ALL)02/95] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear ofthe plastic base until it snaps, locking it intoposition.

*[SV48050( GV)01/95] 4. Close the access panel.


283

%*[SV48370( BCGV)02/95] High-Mount Brakelamp Bulbs

[SV48380( BCGV)06/94] Your vehicle has a brakelamp mounted in therear window, called a high-mount brakelamp.You may need to remove this lamp at times toreplace the brakelamp bulb or to clean the rearwindow.

[SV48700( GV)03/92]


Parts of the high-mount brakelamp


284

% [SV48900( BCGV)06/94] To remove the high-mount brakelamp:

[SV49400( GV)06/94] 1. Remove the two retaining screws with aPhillips screwdriver.

[SV49800( GV)10/90] 2. Then lift the whole assembly up and overthe retaining brackets. Do not move upperpart of plastic attachment brackets.

[SV50010( GV)06/94] 3. Twist socket counterclockwise to removefrom lamp.

[SV50020( GV)06/94] 4. Pull bulb out of socket.

[SV50250( GV)06/94] 5. Replace the burned out bulbs.

*[SV50300( BCGV)02/95] To install the high-mount brakelamp:

[SV50600( GV)10/90] 1. Position the brakelamp over the retainingbrackets.

[SV50900( GV)01/89] 2. Install and tighten the two retaining screws.


285

%*[SV51600( ALL)10/92] Using the Right Bulbs

[SV52000( G )03/95]

thirty-two pica chart:0010441-I


286

%*[SV52400( ALL)03/95] Emission Control System

*[SV52500( ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter which enables your vehicle to complywith applicable exhaust emission requirements.


Exhaust leaks may result in the entry ofharmful and potentially lethal fumes intothe passenger compartment. Underextreme conditions excessive exhausttemperatures could damage the fuelsystem, the interior floor covering, orother vehicle components, possiblycausing a fire.

*[SV52600( ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and theother emission control parts continue to workproperly:

*[SV52700( ALL)01/95] ❑Use only unleaded fuel.

*[SV52800( ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid running out of fuel.

*[SV52900( ALL)01/95] ❑Do not turn off the ignition while yourvehicle is moving, especially at high speeds.

*[SV52950( ALL)01/95] ❑Do not push start your vehicle.

*[SV53000( ALL)03/95] ❑Have the services listed in the MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet performedaccording to the specified schedule. Thescheduled maintenance services are requiredbecause they are considered essential to thelife and performance of your vehicle and toits emissions system.


287

*[SV53075( ALL)03/95] In general, maintenance, replacement, or serviceof the emissions control devices or systems inyour new Ford Motor Company vehicle orengine may be performed at your expense byany automotive repair establishment orindividual using automotive parts equivalent tothose which your vehicle or engine wasoriginally equipped.

*[SV53150( ALL)05/95] Ford strongly recommends the use of genuineFord replacement parts. If other than Ford orMotorcraft parts or Ford authorizedremanufactured parts are used for maintenancereplacements or for the service of componentsaffecting emissions control, such non-Ford partsshould be equivalent to genuine Ford MotorCompany parts in performance and durability. Itis the owner’s responsibility to determine theequivalency of such parts. Please consult yourwarranty booklet for complete warrantyinformation.


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.

*[SV53200( ALL)05/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, lossof oil pressure, the charge warning light, thecheck engine light, or the temperature warninglight. These sometimes indicate that the emissionsystem is not working properly.

*[SV53300( ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to yourvehicle or engine. Changes that cause moreunburned fuel to reach the exhaust system canincrease the temperature of the engine orexhaust system.


288

*[SV53400( ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs,services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, orsupervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted tointentionally remove an emission control deviceor prevent it from working. In some of theUnited States and in Canada, vehicle ownersmay be liable if their emission control device isremoved or is prevented from working.

*[SV53500( ALL)02/92] Never use a metal exhaust collector when youservice your vehicle. If the metal collectorcontacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim orbumper parts they could melt or deform.

*[SV53600( ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operateproperly. See your dealer if the engine runs onfor more than five seconds after you shut it offor if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.

%*[SV53700( ALL)02/95] Information about your vehicle’s emissioncontrol system is on the Vehicle EmissionControl Information decal located on or near theengine. This decal identifies engine displacementand gives some tune-up specifications.

%*[SV53702( ALL)05/95] Readiness for Inspection/MaintenanceTesting

*[SV53715( ALL)05/95] In some localities it may become a legalrequirement to pass anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of theOn-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If thevehicle’s powertrain system or its battery hasjust been serviced, the OBD II system is reset toa not ready for I/M testing condition. Toprepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a“need for additional mixed city and highwaydriving to complete the check” of the OBD IIsystem. As soon as all of the OBD II systemchecks are successfully completed, the OBD IIsystem is set to the ready condition. The amountof driving required to reach the ready condition


289

varies with individual driving patterns. Tocomplete this requirement in the minimumamount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycledefined below. If the vehicle owner cannot ordoes not want to do the additional drivingrequired by law, a service center can performthis drive cycle as it would any other type ofrepair work.

*[SV53717( ALL)05/95] OBD II Drive Cycle

[SV53730( ALL)03/95] The following steps must be run in the ordershown. If steps 2 thru 9 are interrupted, repeatthe preceding step. Any safe driving mode isacceptable between steps.

*[SV53735( ALL)03/95] Always drive vehicle in safe manner accordingto traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.

*[SV53740( ALL)05/95] The engine must be warmed up and atoperating temperature before proceeding withthe drive modes of the following OBD II DriveCycle.

*[SV53745( ALL)05/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral)the vehicle for 4 minutes.

*[SV53747( BCGV)05/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.

*[SV53752( BCGV)05/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (72 km/h)at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds.

*[SV53757( BCGV)05/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at45 mph (72 km/h) for 30 seconds.

*[SV53763( BCGV)05/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.


290

*[SV53768( BCGV)05/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic atspeeds between 25 and 40 mph(40-64 km/h) for 15 minutes. During the 15minute drive cycle the following modes mustbe achieved:

*[SV53772( ALL)05/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10seconds each

*[SV53775( ALL)05/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2throttle position, and

*[SV53777( ALL)05/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5minute steady state throttle drives.

*[SV53780( BCGV)05/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and60 mph (72-97 km/h). This should takeapproximately 5 minutes.

*[SV53784( BCGV)05/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady atthe selected speed between 45 and 60 mph(72-97 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.

*[SV53788( BCGV)05/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varyingspeeds between 45 and 60 mph(72-97 km/h).

*[SV53792( BCGV)05/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in drivefor 40 seconds.

*[SV53796( ALL)05/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed.Vehicle can be turned off when convenient.


291

*[SV53800( ALL)03/95] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts,and Lubricant Specifications

%*[SV53900( ALL)03/95] Refill Capacities

[SV54300( GV)03/95]

twenty-two pica chart:0010448-M

*[SV54550( ALL)03/95] NOTE: Rear axle lube quantities must bereplaced every 100,000 miles(160,000 km) or if the axle has beensubmerged in water. Otherwise, thelube should not be checked or changedunless a leak is suspected or repairrequired.


292

*[SV54600( ALL)01/95] Motorcraft Parts

[SV54900( GV)03/94]

fourteen pica chart:0010453-J

[SV55000( ALL)09/94] If a spark plug is removed for examination, itmust be reinstalled in the same cylinder.

[SV55100( ALL)05/95] For 4.6L (2V) engines:

[SV55125( ALL)05/95] Cylinders #1, #2, #3, #4 have a PG suffix.

[SV55150( ALL)05/95] Cylinders #5, #6, #7, #8 have a P suffix.

[SV55200( ALL)03/95] If a spark plug needs to be replaced, use onlyspark plugs with the service number suffix letteras shown on the engine decal.


293

%*[SV55300( ALL)03/95] Lubricant Specifications

[SV56000( GV)05/95]

thirty pica chart:0010586-R

*[SV56400( ALL)03/95] NOTE: Rear axle lube quantities must bereplaced every 100,000 miles(160,000 km) or if the axle has beensubmerged in water. Otherwise, thelube should not be checked or changedunless a leak is suspected or repairrequired.


294

%*[SV57000( ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage

*[SV57100( ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips

*[SV57150( ALL)01/95] If you plan on storing your vehicle for anextended period of time (60 days or more), referto the following maintenance recommendationsto ensure your vehicle stays in good operatingcondition.

*[SV57200( ALL)01/95] General

*[SV57300( ALL)01/95] ❑Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.

*[SV57400( ALL)01/95] ❑Protect from sunlight, if possible.

*[SV57500( ALL)01/95] ❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they requireregular maintenance to protect against rustand damage.

*[SV57600( ALL)01/95] Body

*[SV57700( ALL)01/95] ❑Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt,grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces,rear wheel housing and underside of frontfenders.

*[SV57800( ALL)01/95] ❑Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposedlocations.

*[SV57900( ALL)01/95] ❑Touch-up raw or primed metal to preventrust.

*[SV58000( ALL)01/95] ❑Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with athick coat of auto wax to preventdiscoloration. Re-wax as necessary when thevehicle is washed.


295

*[SV58100( ALL)04/95] ❑Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hingesand latches with a light grade oil.

*[SV58200( ALL)01/95] ❑Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.

*[SV58300( ALL)01/95] ❑Keep all rubber parts free from oil andsolvents.

%*[SV58350( ALL)01/95] Engine

*[SV58400( ALL)01/95] ❑Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idleuntil it reaches normal operating temperature.

*[SV58500( ALL)01/95] ❑With your foot on the brake, shift through allthe gears while the engine is running.

%*[SV58600( ALL)01/95] Fuel system

*[SV58700( ALL)07/94] ❑Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fueluntil the first automatic shutoff of the fuelpump nozzle.

*[SV58900( ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehiclestorage (60 days or more), fuel maydeteriorate due to oxidation. This candamage rubber and other polymers inthe fuel system and may also clogsmall orifices.

*[SV59000( ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added wheneveractual or expected storage periods exceed 60days. Follow the instructions on the label. Thevehicle should then be operated at idle speed tocirculate the additive throughout the fuel system.

%*[SV59200( ALL)01/95] Cooling system

*[SV59300( ALL)01/95] ❑Protect against freezing temperatures.


296

%*[SV59400( ALL)01/95] Battery

*[SV59500( ALL)01/95] ❑Check and recharge as necessary.

*[SV59600( ALL)01/95] ❑Keep connections clean and covered with alight coat of grease.

*[SV59650( ALL)03/95] ❑ If storing your vehicle for more than 30 dayswithout recharging the battery, it may beadvisable to disconnect the battery cables toensure battery charge is maintained for quickstarting.

[SV59675( ALL)05/94] NOTE: If battery cables are disconnected, itwill be necessary to reset memoryfeatures.

%*[SV59700( ALL)01/95] Brakes

*[SV59800( ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure brakes and parking brake are fullyreleased.

%*[SV59900( ALL)01/95] Tires

*[SV60000( ALL)05/95] ❑Maintain recommended air pressure.

*[SV60100( ALL)01/95] Miscellaneous

*[SV60200( ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure all linkages, cables, levers andclevis pins under vehicle are covered withgrease to prevent rust.

*[SV60300( ALL)03/95] ❑Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15days to lubricate working parts and preventcorrosion.


297

[SV05/95]

thirty-six chart:MERCADPLN


303

[QI03150( GV)06/95]


Label Locations

File:rcqig.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 07:49:09 1996

304

[QI03200( G )05/95]

full page art:0011127-C

Front Exterior View


305

[QI03400( G )05/95]


Rear Exterior View


306

[QI03550( G )05/95]


Entrance View


307

[QI03700( G )05/95]


Driver’s Door


308

[QI03900( G )05/95]


Instrument Panel


309

[QI04100( G )05/95]

full page art:0011312-B

Instrument Cluster — Mechanical


310

[QI04250( G )05/95]


Instrument Cluster — Electronic


311

[QI04300( G )05/95]


Trunk


312

[QI04600( G )05/95]


4.6L Engine Compartment


Index 313

Index

AABS warning light

(see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . 50, 84Accessory position on the ignition . . . . . 37Accessory power source,

power point outlet . . . . . . . . . . 145Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 246Air bag supplemental restraint system

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 68operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Air cleaner filter, location . . . . . . . . 237Air conditioning

electronic automatic temperature controlsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

manual heating and airconditioning system . . . . . . . . . 88

Air suspensiondescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182see also Rear air suspension system . . 182

Alarm, activating remote personal . . . . 132Aluminum wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . 208Antenna, radio

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 154Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . 249Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179see also Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 179warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 84

Ashtray(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Assistance (see Customer assistance) . . . 213

File:rcixg.exUpdate:Wed Jan 31 09:58:27 1996

314 Index

Audio system(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 149

Automatic transmissiondriving an automatic overdrive . . . . . 171fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 266fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 291fluid, specification . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Axle, traction lok . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

BBacking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 3Battery

acid, treating emergencies . . . . . . . 195battery saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130charging system warning light . . . . 52, 69disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256how to service . . . . . . . . . . . . 255jumping a disabled battery . . . . . . . 195maintenance-free . . . . . . . . . . . 255proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . 255replacement, specifications . . . . . . . 292voltage gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 296

Black dust shield . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Brake fluid

brake warning light . . . . . . . . . 49, 85specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Brakelampbulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 285high-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . . 283

Brakesadjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179anti-lock brake system (ABS)

warning light. . . . . . . . . . . 50, 84applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . 179brake warning light . . . . . . . . . 49, 85fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . 268


Index 315

Brakes (continued)fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 293front disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179new brake linings. . . . . . . . . . . . 4noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 296

Brake-shift interlock . . . . . . . . . . . 172Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Bulbs, replacing

headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

C

Canada, customer assistance . . . . . . . 222Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan

(CAMVAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . 291Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . 43Car seats for children

(see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . . . 26Cassette tape player

(see Electronic sound system) . . . 149, 159Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . 286Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . . 60Charging system warning light . . . . . 52, 69Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 24

child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 35child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Child safety seatsand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 26automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . 28in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . . 28in rear center seat . . . . . . . . . . . 34


316 Index

Chimekey in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 65

Circuit breakerschecking and replacing . . . . . . . . 279see also fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Cleaning your vehiclechrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . 6engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . 239exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 103fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 88instrument panel lens . . . . . . . . . 110interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . 109mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . 139washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Climate control systemair conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 90electronic automatic

temperature control . . . . . . . . . . 90heating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 90

Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Coolant (see Engine coolant)

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 249drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . 253preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 295proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 251refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 291refill procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 253specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . 58, 64


Index 317

Cruise control (see Speed control) . . . . 118Cupholder(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Customer Assistance Center, Ford

(U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Customer Assistance Centre,

Ford of Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . 216

D

Dashboard (see Instrument panel) . . . . . 87Daytime running light system . . . . . . 102Defrost

rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 98

Dipstick, automatic transmission fluid. . . 267Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . . . 217Doors

door ajar warning message . . . . . . . 82lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . 293

Driving under special conditionsbad weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186high water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185slippery roads . . . . . . . . . . . . 184towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Dust shield, black . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

E

Electrical systemcircuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 279fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271power point outlet . . . . . . . . . . 145

Electronic message center(see Message center) . . . . . . . . . . 74

Electronic sound systemantenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . 167tuning the radio . . . . . . . . . 150, 161warranty and service information . . . 170


318 Index

Emergencies, roadsideassistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . . . 195jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . . . 180Emission control system,

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . 286Engine

check engine warning light . . . . . 55, 66does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . . 39fuel system shut-off switch. . . . . . . . 45preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . . 39service points . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 45storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 295

Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Engine coolant

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 249checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 250disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 295proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 251recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 249refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 291specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Engine coolant temperature gaugedescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 64electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Engine oilchanging oil and oil filter . . . . . . . 248checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 246dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 61engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . 69filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 292


Index 319

Engine oil (continued)refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 291specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Entry systemilluminated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125keyless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125remote. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . 4

FFederal Communications Commission . . . 169Flashers, hazard. . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Flashing the lights. . . . . . . . . . . . 112Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . 291Ford Customer Assistance Center . . . . . 216Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . 217Ford Extended Service Plan . . . . . . . . 4Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . 222Ford of Canada Customer

Assistance Centre . . . . . . . . . . . 222Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . 223French owner guides, how to obtain . . . . 3Fuel

capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . . . 239filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 292fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 71storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 295

Fuel and distance computeraverage economy . . . . . . . . . . . . 77english/metric button . . . . . . . . . . 75fuel remaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72instantaneous economy . . . . . . . . . 78reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75


320 Index

Fuel and distance computer (continued)select button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75to empty indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 76trip distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79trip/reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Fuel cap, removing . . . . . . . . . . . 239Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . 292Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 71Fuel pump shut-off switch, starting

after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Fuse panels

engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . 275high current fuse panel . . . . . . . . 276instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Fusescharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273checking and replacing . . . . . . . . 278circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

G

Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . 239Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . 239Gauges, Electronic

engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 64fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Gauges, Mechanicalbattery voltage gauge . . . . . . . . . . 60engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 58engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 61fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186


Index 321

Gearshiftautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 171column-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . 173positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171shift-lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

HHazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Headlamps

autolamp system . . . . . . . . . . . 104bulb specification . . . . . . . . . . . 285checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . 281cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103daytime running lights . . . . . . . . 102flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 280turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . 103

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Heated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Heating

electronic automatic temperaturecontrol system . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

manual heating and airconditioning system . . . . . . . . . 88

High beams, indicator light . . . . . . 54, 66High-mount brakelamp

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283replacing the bulb . . . . . . . . . . 284

Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Hood

latch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236lubrication specifications. . . . . . . . 293release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250


322 Index

I

Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . 216Idle

relearning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Ignitionchime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 37removing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . . . . 26Instrument cluster

electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Instrument panelcleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110lighting up panel and interior . . . . . 106location of components . . . . . . . . . 87

Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

J

Jackoperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Jump-starting your vehicleattaching cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 197disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . 199

K

Keyless entry systemautolock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127locking and unlocking doors . . . . . . 126programming entry code. . . . . . . . 128

Keyskey in ignition chime . . . . . . . . . . 38positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 37removing from the ignition . . . . . . . 38stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . 38


Index 323

L

Lampsautolamp delay system . . . . . . . . 104bulb replacement specifications chart . . 285checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280courtesy lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 109daytime running light system . . . . . 102dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108flashing the lamps . . . . . . . . . . 112hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . 115headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103high beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112high-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . . 283illuminated entry system . . . . . . . 125illuminated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 144interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 106map lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 280trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Lane change indicator(see Turn signal) . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Lights, warning and indicatorair bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 68air suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55anti-lock brakes (ABS). . . . . . . . 50, 84anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 85charging system . . . . . . . . . . 52, 69check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 66door ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 69hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . . 86high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 66low fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54low washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 81oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69overdrive off . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 81


324 Index

Lights, warning and indicator (continued)safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 65trunk ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82turn signal indicator. . . . . . . . . 57, 70

Load limitsGAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . 293Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 146Lug nuts, tightening sequence . . . . . . 207

M

Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . 233Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . . . 268Message center

door ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82english/metric button . . . . . . . . . . 75low washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 81reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75select button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75trunk ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Mirrorsautomatic dimming rearview mirror . . 140heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140side view mirrors (power) . . . . . . . 141vanity mirror, illuminated . . . . . . . 144

Motorcraft parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

N

National Highway TrafficSafety Administration . . . . . . . . . 221


Index 325

O

Odometerdescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 73trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . 245Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . 288Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

P

Panic alarm feature, remoteentry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Parking brakeoperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 85

Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) . . . . . . . 292PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . . 292Power distribution box (see Fuses) . . . . 271Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Power features

antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . 138mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Power point electrical outlet . . . . . . . 145Power steering

driving with power steering . . . . . . 178fluid, checking and adding . . . . . . 270fluid, refill capacity . . . . . . . . . . 291fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 293servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178


326 Index

R

Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . 149Rear air suspension system . . . . . . . . 182Rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Rear window, defroster . . . . . . . . . 101Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . . . . 291Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Remote control, trunk . . . . . . . . . . 147Remote entry system

locking/unlocking doors . . . . . . . . 131opening the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . 131panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132replacement/additional transmitters. . . 133replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . 132

Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)adult. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 213Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 195Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

S

Safe driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . 7Safety chains, when towing a trailer . . . . 192Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . 221Safety restraints

adjusting the safety belts. . . . . 10, 12, 15automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . 11cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . . 17extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 16for children. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24for pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . 14replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16warning light and chime. . . . . . . 51, 65


Index 327

Safety seats for childrenand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 26attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . 26automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . 28in center seating positions . . . . . . . . 34in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . 28tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . . 26

Seatsadjusting the seat, manual . . . . . . . 136adjusting the seats, power . . . . . . . 138child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 26cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . 139head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 135reclining the seat . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Serial number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . 216Service concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Servicing your vehicle, precautions when

servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Side mirrors

adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . 265Spare tire

changing the tire . . . . . . . . . . . 203conventional spare . . . . . . . . . . 201finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . 202removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . 202temporary spare . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . 292Specification chart, lubricants. . . . . . . 293Speed control

accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120cancelling a set speed . . . . . . . . . 122resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120resuming a set speed . . . . . . . . . 122tap up/tap down . . . . . . . . . . . 121turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122when towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . 194


328 Index

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 73Starting your vehicle

preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . . 39starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . . 40starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 45starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . . 40

Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Steering wheel

horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37speed controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 118tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Storage compartments, map pockets . . . . 146Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 294Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Supplemental air bag readiness light . . 52, 68Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . 17

T

Tail lampsbulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 285cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Temperature control(see Climate control) . . . . . . . . . . 88

Tether anchor installation(see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . . . 26

Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Tires

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . 260cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . 265storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 296tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263wear bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262


Index 329

Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . 188Towing your vehicle,

with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . 211Traction assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Traction-lok rear axle . . . . . . . . . . 176Trailer towing

calculating maximum trailer weight . . 189safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192trailer lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Transmissionautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 171fluid, checking and adding

(automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 266fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 291lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . 293

Transmission control switch . . . . . . . 174Transmitter (see Remote entry) . . . . . . 130Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Trunk

remote release lever. . . . . . . . . . 147trunk ajar warning light . . . . . . . . . 82using the keys to open . . . . . . . . 146using the remote entry

system to open. . . . . . . . . . . 131Tune-up specifications (VECI) . . . . . . 288Turn signal

indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 70lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

U

Used engine oil, disposal . . . . . . . . 248


330 Index

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . 113VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information)

decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 216Vehicle loading

automatic transmissions . . . . . . . . 186calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . 186

Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . 246Visor (see Sun visor) . . . . . . . . . . . 143

W

Warm engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . . 40Warning chimes

key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 65

Warranties, radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . 3Washer fluid

reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . 186Wheels

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 259

Windowsone-touch down. . . . . . . . . . . . 135power windows, operating . . . . . . . 134rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . 101


Index 331

Windshield washer fluid and wiperschecking and adding fluid . . . . . . . 256checking and replacing wiper blades . . 258low washer fluid light. . . . . . . . . . 81operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257


332

Service StationInformation

[GS00600( G )05/95]


File:rcgsg.exUpdate:Tue Jan 30 08:02:38 1996

Documents

96 grand marquis